Pontiac 2007, 2007 Vibe Owner's manual

Pontiac 2007, 2007 Vibe Owner's manual
2007 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 8
Rear Seats ............................................. 16
Safety Belts ............................................ 18
Child Restraints ...................................... 37
Airbag System ........................................ 63
Restraint System Check
......................... 82
Features and Controls ................................ 85
Keys ....................................................... 87
Doors and Locks .................................... 92
Windows
................................................ 98
Theft-Deterrent Systems
....................... 100
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 102
Mirrors .................................................. 121
OnStar® System ................................... 123
Storage Areas
...................................... 127
Sunroof
................................................ 131
M
Instrument Panel .......................................
Instrument Panel Overview ...................
Climate Controls ...................................
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
..........................................
Audio System(s) ...................................
133
136
152
158
177
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 221
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
..................................... 222
Towing
................................................. 259
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood .........
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...
269
272
274
280
315
321
1
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
Vehicle Identification .............................
Electrical System ..................................
Capacities and Specifications ................
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts ............................
2
322
354
363
364
369
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 373
Maintenance Schedule .......................... 374
370
Index .......................................................... 419
Customer Assistance Information ............. 399
Customer Assistance and Information ... 400
Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 416
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than
one entertainment system may be offered or
your vehicle may have been ordered without a
front passenger or rear seats.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the name
VIBE are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
make changes after that time without further
notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in
this manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15863402 A First Printing
©
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there
if it is needed when on the road. If the vehicle
is sold, leave this manual in it so the new owner
can use it.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to
ignore the warning.
4
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If
you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,” “Do
Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 8
Manual Seats ................................................ 8
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10
Head Restraints .......................................... 13
Passenger Folding Seatback ....................... 14
Rear Seats .................................................... 16
Rear Seat Operation ................................... 16
Safety Belts .................................................. 18
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 22
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 23
Driver Position ............................................. 24
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 32
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 33
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 36
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 36
Child Restraints ............................................ 37
Older Children ............................................. 37
Infants and Young Children ......................... 40
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 43
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 47
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 49
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 56
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position .................................. 58
Airbag System .............................................. 63
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 66
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 70
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 71
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 72
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................... 72
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 74
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 80
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 81
Restraint System Check ............................... 82
Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 82
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ................................................... 83
7
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
8
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your
body to be sure the seat is locked in place.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
The driver seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat. To raise the seat, pull up
on the lever repeatedly until the seat is at the
desired height. To lower the seat, push down on
the lever repeatedly until the seat is at the desired
height.
It is easier to use the adjuster when the seat is
unoccupied.
9
Reclining Seatbacks
10
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The
lever used to operate them is located on the
outboard side of the seats.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
11
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
12
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press the
button, located on the
top of the seatback,
and push the head
restraint down.
The rear seats may have head restraints that
can be adjusted in height like the front head
restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a
neck injury in a crash.
13
Passenger Folding Seatback
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry
longer objects, such as skis, be sure any
such cargo is not near an airbag. In a
crash, an inflating airbag might force that
object toward a person. This could cause
severe injury or even death. Secure
objects away from the area in which an
airbag would inflate. For more
information, see Where Are the Airbags?
on page 66 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 253.
14
Things you put on this seatback can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash. Remove or secure
all items before driving.
You can fold the front passenger’s seatback down
to allow for more cargo space or as a temporary
table while the vehicle is stopped. When the
area is not being used for more cargo space, the
seatback should be placed in the locked,
upright position.
To fold the seatback down, do the following:
1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position
and make sure the seatback is at the most
upright position and locked.
2. Pull up on one of the
levers located on
either side of the
back of the
passenger’s
seatback.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull up on one of the levers located on either
side of the back of the passenger’s seatback.
2. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock
it into place. Make sure the safety belt is not
twisted or caught in the seatback.
3. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be
sure it is locked into position.
4. Use the reclining front seatback lever to
adjust the seatback to a comfortable position.
3. Fold the seatback down.
15
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
You can fold either side of the seatback down for
more cargo space. The rear right side seatback
can also be used as a temporary table while
the vehicle is stopped. Make sure the front
seatback is not reclined or in the rearward most
position. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold down
all the way.
{CAUTION:
A rear seatback folded forward, or any
other object contacting or pressing the
front seatback may affect the proper
functioning of the passenger sensing
system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 74.
16
To fold either seatback down, do the following:
1. Pull up on the lock
release knob,
located on the top
outboard side
of the seatbacks.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
2. Fold the seatback down. Each seatback can
be folded separately.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the
safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
1. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lock
it into place. Make sure the safety belts are
not twisted or caught in the seatback.
2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be
sure it is locked into position.
17
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
18
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt
Reminder Light on
page 161.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is
why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
19
Put someone on it.
20
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The
rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
or the instrument panel...
21
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
22
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as bad
drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of
less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page 37 or Infants and Young
Children on page 40. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
23
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To
see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
24
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 36.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 31.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt. It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt through the latch
plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
25
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
26
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
27
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
28
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It
should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
29
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your dealer
to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
30
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The
belt should be away from your face and neck, but
not falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down,
squeeze the button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can
move the height
adjuster up just by
pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without squeezing
the release button to make sure it has locked into
position.
31
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 24.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature. If this happens, let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
32
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
33
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make
sure it is secure. If the buckle does not click,
check to be sure that you are using the
correct buckle. The buckle for the center
rear passenger position has the word
CENTER on it.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 36.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
34
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the pelvic bones. And
you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
35
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners.
Although you cannot see them, they are located on
the retractor part of the safety belts for the driver
and right front passenger. They help the safety
belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a
moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash.
If the passenger sensing system detects that there
is not a passenger in the right front passenger
position, the safety belt pretensioner for that
position will not activate. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 74.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 83.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order
36
it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Always disconnect the extender from the safety belt
after you use it so that the airbag will work properly
the next time someone uses that seat.
When you use a safety belt extender in the right
front passenger’s seat, make sure the passenger
airbag status indicator shows “ON.” See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 163. If
the indicator shows “OFF,” disconnect the
extender’s latch from the buckle then reconnect
the safety belt. Make sure the indicator light shows
“ON”, then reconnect the safety belt extender. If
you use the safety belt extender while the indicator
light shows “OFF,” the right front passenger’s
frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped) may not activate correctly. See
Airbag System on page 63 for important safety
information about your airbags.
Child Restraints
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
belts?
Older Children
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The
shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below
the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It
should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
37
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in the center rear seat
passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only
one person at a time.
38
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
39
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
40
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system
can provide.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
41
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
42
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
43
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint
with the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
44
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
45
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that
came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system.
46
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 49 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat, and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the childis properly secured, following the
instructions that came with that restraint.
47
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
CAUTION:
48
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(if equipped) under certain conditions,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even
when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system.
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint
and its attachments. The following explains
how to attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
49
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to
be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. In the United
States, some child restraints also have a
top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
50
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the
trim cover.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Rear Seat
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with
lower anchors has
two labels, near the
crease between the
seatback and the seat
cushion.
The top tether anchors are located on the floor of
the rear cargo area. Open the trim cover to
access the anchors. You may have to fold back
the cargo mat to access the top tether anchors.
51
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint
say that the top tether must be attached. There is
no place to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 47 for additional information.
52
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only
one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single anchor
could cause the anchor or attachment to
come loose or even break during a crash.
A child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
Secure any unused safety belts behind
the child restraint so children cannot
reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the
way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child
restraint has been installed. Be sure to
follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
53
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
54
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. You may have to fold back the cargo
mat to access the top tether anchors.
2.3. Open the top tether anchor trim cover
to expose the anchor.
2.4. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether over the
seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether around the head
restraint.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the head restraint
and route the tether
under the head restraint
and in between the head
restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
55
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 49.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
56
3. Buckle the belt. If the buckle does not click,
check to be sure that you are using the
correct buckle. The buckle for the center
rear passenger position has the word
CENTER on it.
Make sure the release button is positioned so
you would be able to unbuckle the safety
belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
57
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
child restraint and to Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 49.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if your child restraint
has a top tether, disconnect the top tether from
the top tether anchor. Unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
58
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put
the Restraint on page 47.
In addition, your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped), and the safety belt pretensioner,
when a child in a child restraint or booster seat is
detected. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 74 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 163 for more information about the
conditions that could affect the passenger sensing
system and other important safety information.
Your vehicle has a label on the sun visor that
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) under certain conditions, no
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the forward-facing child restraint. See Manual
Seats on page 8.
59
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 49.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 49 if
the child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
60
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has airbags. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 74. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, even if the airbags are
off. If your child restraint is forward-facing,
move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the child restraint in this seat.
See Manual Seats on page 8.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), and the safety belt pretensioner,
the OFF indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay lit when
you turn the ignition to ON. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 163.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
61
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the passenger sensing system has turned
off the airbags and safety belt pretensioner,
the OFF indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will be lit and stay lit when the
key is turned to ON.
If a child restraint has been installed and the ON
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint with the ignition key in the ACC
(Accessory) or LOCK position.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
62
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the ON indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the seatback and
adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also make sure
the child restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the
head restraint.
If the ON indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle and check with your dealer.
If the airbag readiness light and the OFF light in
the passenger airbag status indicator come
on together, it may mean there is a malfunction in
the passenger sensing system. Secure the
child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
right front passenger.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver and the passenger seated directly
behind the driver.
• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for the
right front passenger and the passenger
seated directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact
airbags, it will say SRS-SIDE AIRBAG on a label
on the side of the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seat closest to the door.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact
airbags, it will say SRS CURTAIN AIRBAG on the
trim on the side of the windshield.
63
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
64
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags for the driver and
passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
Side impact airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe crashes
where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags
inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 37 or Infants and Young Children on
page 40.
65
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag
symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 162 for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
66
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver, it is in the side of the driver’s
seatback closest to the door.
67
If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front passenger, it is in the side
of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
68
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver, it is in the ceiling above
the side windows.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind that passenger,
it is in the ceiling above the side windows.
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. If your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your
vehicle by routing the rope or tie-down
through any door or window opening. If
you do, the path of an inflating airbag will
be blocked. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear.
69
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on only how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you
hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. Your vehicle is equipped with
electronic frontal sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a moderate frontal
impact and a more severe frontal impact. For
moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at
a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
70
Frontal airbags may inflate at different vehicle
crash speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the
object.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger may also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle such
as hitting a curb, falling into a deep hole, or landing
hard. The frontal airbags (driver and right front
passenger) are not intended to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side
impacts.
It is possible that, in a crash involving the front of
your vehicle, only one of the two frontal airbags
in your vehicle will deploy. This is rare, but it can
happen in a crash just severe enough to make
a frontal airbag inflate.
Side impact airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact
airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed “threshold level.” The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or
in many rear impacts. Your vehicle has sensors
which detect side impacts. These sensors
signal the appropriate side airbag to inflate. Both
side impact airbags (seat-mounted and
roof-mounted) are intended to deploy on the side
of the vehicle that is struck. It is possible that,
in a crash involving the rear side of your vehicle,
that only the roof-mounted airbag will deploy.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, vehicle
speed, and how quickly the vehicle slows down in
frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
airbags, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the
airbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal
airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are
also airbag modules in the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles with
roof-mounted side impact airbags, there are
also airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
near the side window.
71
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But
the frontal airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including many frontal or
near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for vehicles with side
impact airbags.
72
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag
inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags may still
be at least partially inflated minutes after the vehicle
comes to rest. Some components of the airbag
module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
airbag, the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest to
the door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped), and the garnish trim and the area
along the ceiling of your vehicle near the side
windows for the roof–mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped) — may be hot for a short time. The
parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There may be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,
and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers off again by using the controls for those
features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
73
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders on page 411.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean that
the airbag system will not work properly. See
your dealer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. A
passenger airbag status indicator on the
instrument panel will be visible when you turn your
ignition key to ON.
The words ON and OFF
will be visible in the
passenger airbag status
indicator during the
system check.
74
When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF will be visible depending
on whether the seat is occupied and/or the
weight of the occupant. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 163. The passenger
sensing system will turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag, seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped), and the safety
belt pretensioner under certain conditions. The
driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat
assembly and safety belt assembly. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag, seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped), and the safety belt
pretensioner should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. We recommend that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in
a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding
in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as
far back as it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
(Continued)
75
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
and the safety belt pretensioner if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that a small child
is present in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),
and the safety belt pretensioner, the OFF indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag is off.
76
If a child restraint has been installed and the ON
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint with the ignition key in the ACC or
LOCK position, following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
on page 58.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the ON indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the ON indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle and check with your dealer.
An object, person or child in the rear seat
contacting or pressing the right front passenger’s
seatback, or objects stowed under the right
front passenger’s seat, may affect the proper
functioning of the passenger sensing system.
When you use a safety belt extender in the right
front passenger’s seat, make sure the passenger
airbag status indicator shows the word ON. If
the indicator shows OFF, disconnect the
extender’s latch from the buckle then reconnect
the safety belt. Make sure the indicator light shows
ON, then reconnect the safety belt extender. If
you use the safety belt extender while the indicator
light shows OFF, the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), and the safety belt pretensioner may
not activate correctly. See Airbag System on
page 63 for important safety information about your
airbags.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), and the safety belt pretensioner
anytime the system senses that a person of
adult size is sitting properly in the right front
passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags and pretensioner
to be enabled, the ON indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbags and
pretensioner are active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the
airbags and pretensioner, depending upon the
person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone
in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt properly — whether
or not there is an airbag for that person.
77
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the OFF indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and then enable the
passenger’s airbags.
If the airbag readiness light and the OFF light in
the passenger airbag status indicator come
on together, it may mean there is a malfunction in
the passenger sensing system. Secure the
child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle and check with your dealer.
78
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system. If
this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the frontal airbag. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 162 for
more on this, including important safety
information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers or
seat backpacks, can affect how well the passenger
sensing system operates. You may want to
consider not using seat covers, seat backpacks, or
other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 81 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
79
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a
service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 417.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
80
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If
you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 400.
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling and
pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbag
modules, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on
page 400.
81
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Care of Safety Belts on page 357 for more
information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced.
(The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.)
82
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, or
the airbag covering on the driver’s and right
front passenger’s seatback (if equipped), or the
side impact airbag covering on the ceiling near
the side windows (if equipped), the bag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the
airbag module in the steering wheel, both the
airbag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s airbag, the airbag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right
front passenger’s seat-mounted side impact
airbags (if equipped), or side impact airbag
module and ceiling covering for the
roof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped).
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to
replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the
new retractor assembly will be there to help protect
you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle or while you are driving. See
Airbag Readiness Light on page 162.
83
✍ NOTES
84
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys .............................................................. 87
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 89
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ................................................. 90
Doors and Locks .......................................... 92
Door Locks ................................................. 92
Power Door Locks ....................................... 94
Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 95
Liftgate/Liftglass ........................................... 96
Windows ....................................................... 98
Manual Windows ......................................... 99
Power Windows .......................................... 99
Sun Visors .................................................. 99
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 100
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 100
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 102
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 102
Ignition Positions ....................................... 103
Starting the Engine .................................... 104
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 106
Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 108
Overdrive Off ............................................. 111
Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 111
Parking Brake ........................................... 114
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 115
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 117
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle) ................................ 118
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 118
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 119
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 120
Mirrors ......................................................... 121
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 121
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 121
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror .......... 122
Outside Remote Control Mirrors ................ 122
Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 123
OnStar® System .......................................... 123
85
Section 2
Features and Controls
Storage Areas ............................................. 127
Glove Box ................................................. 127
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 127
Coinholder(s) ............................................. 127
Instrument Panel Storage Area .................. 127
Center Console Storage Area .................... 127
86
Floor Mats ................................................. 127
Rear Storage Area .................................... 128
Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ........ 129
Cargo Cover ............................................. 129
Cargo Tie Downs ...................................... 130
Sunroof ....................................................... 131
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows
will function with the keys in the ignition
and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
87
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and
all other locks.
Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or
a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys.
Keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose your key,
you’ll be able to have a new one made easily
using this code.
If you need a new key, contact your dealership to
obtain the correct key code. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 406 for more
information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer
removes the key tag from the key and gives it to
the first owner.
88
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This
is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far
from your vehicle. You may need to stand
closer during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 90.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
or a qualified technician for service.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
89
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and
unlock your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up
to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless
entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
The remote keyless entry transmitter will look
different if your vehicle was purchased in Canada,
however it will operate the same.
LOCK: Press this button
to lock all of the doors.
The turn signal lights will flash once to confirm
that the doors have locked.
90
UNLOCK: Press this button once to unlock the
driver’s door. The turn signal lights will flash twice
and the interior lamps will come on to confirm that
the door has unlocked. If the UNLOCK button is
pressed again within three seconds, all remaining
doors will unlock and the turn signal lights will flash
twice and interior lamps will remain on to confirm
that all doors & hatch have unlocked. The interior
lamps will stay on for 15 seconds or until the
ignition is turned on.
HATCH/GLASS: Press this button to open the
rear liftglass. If the ignition key is in the ON
position, the liftglass cannot be opened by the
HATCH/GLASS button on the transmitter.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased through your
dealer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer.
When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining
transmitters must also be matched. Once your
dealer has coded the new transmitter, the
lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each
vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters
matched to it.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter
will not work at the normal range in any location.
If you have to get close to your vehicle before
the transmitter works, it is probably time to change
the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote
keyless entry transmitter should last about
three years.
91
To replace the battery, do the following:
1. Insert a small coin or similar object to separate
the bottom half from the top half of the
transmitter.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the
new one. Make sure the positive side of the
battery faces upward. For battery replacement,
use a three-volt battery, type CR2032, or
equivalent.
3. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to
be sure no moisture can enter.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
92
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A
child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
From the outside, use your key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, if equipped. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 90 for more information.
If your vehicle has power door locks, open the
driver’s door by turning the key in the lock toward
the rear of the vehicle. Turning the key back
toward the center, then toward the rear again will
unlock all of the doors. Using the key in the
passenger’s door will also unlock all of the doors.
Lock a door by turning the key toward the front
of the vehicle. If you have power door locks, all the
doors will lock.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
93
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power door
lock switch is located
on the armrest of
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door.
To manually lock the door from the inside, press
the knob on the door forward. To unlock the
door, press the knob rearward. With manual locks,
you must use the key to lock and unlock the
liftgate.
94
e (Power Door Lock): Press the top of the
switch to lock all the doors. Press the bottom of
the switch to unlock all the doors.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security
locks that help prevent passengers from opening
the rear doors on your vehicle from the inside.
The security locks are
located on the inside of
the rear door trim.
To use these locks, do the following:
1. Slide the lever down.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be
opened from the inside when this feature is in use.
To open a rear door with the security lock, do
the following:
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults
and older children who ride in the rear won’t be
able to open the rear door from the inside.
You should let adults and older children know how
these security locks work, and how to cancel
the locks.
95
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the
door from the outside.
2. Slide the lever up.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
96
Liftgate/Liftglass
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the
liftgate or liftglass open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It
can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate or
liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control
system to its highest speed and select
the control setting that will force
outside air into your vehicle. See
“Climate Control System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the
way. See Engine Exhaust on page 119.
Liftgate/Liftglass Release
To unlock and open the liftgate using the key,
insert the key into the keyhole and turn
counterclockwise. Raise the liftgate by hand.
To open the liftglass using the key, insert the key
into the keyhole and turn clockwise to the
second position. Use the handle in the center of
the liftglass to help in lifting the glass.
Your vehicle may have
a liftglass release button
which is located on
the instrument panel to
the left of the steering
wheel. Press this button
to release the liftglass.
When closing the liftgate, use the handle to pull
it down.
To lock the liftgate, turn the key clockwise to the
first position.
97
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
98
Manual Windows
Use the window crank to open and close each
window.
Power Windows
If your vehicle has this
feature, the switches
controlling the driver’s
and passenger’s
windows are located on
the driver’s door.
AUTO (Express-Down): Press this switch all the
way down and release it to lower the driver’s
window quickly.
o (Lock-Out): Press the window lock-out button,
located near the driver’s power door lock switches,
to disable the passenger’s power window switches.
Press the button again to enable the window
switches.
Only the driver’s window will operate with the
lock-out button pressed.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, swing down the sun visors.
You can also swing them to the side.
The visors can be slid along the rod for extended
coverage for the side windows unless your
vehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags.
The power window switch on each passenger
door controls that window only. These switches
work while the ignition is turned to ON.
Press the front of a switch to lower a window and
lift the front of the switch to raise a window.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Swing down the sun visor to expose the vanity
mirror. The vanity mirror may have a cover. Lift the
cover to expose the mirror.
99
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If your vehicle has this feature, the theft-deterrent
system is designed to activate an alarm if any
of the side doors or the liftgate is forcibly unlocked
or if the battery terminal is disconnected and
then reconnected while the system is set.
The alarm will sound the horn intermittently and
flash the headlamps, turn signal lamps and interior
lights. If the driver’s or front passenger’s side
doors are unlocked forcibly, the other side doors
and the liftgate will be locked automatically.
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position
and remove it.
2. Close and lock all doors and liftgate with the
key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
100
The indicator light
located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering
wheel will come
on when all doors and
liftgate are closed
and locked.
The system will be automatically set after
30 seconds. When the system is set,
the indicator light will start flashing.
3. After the indicator light starts flashing, you
may leave the vehicle.
Do not leave anyone in the vehicle when you
set the system, because unlocking the
vehicle from the inside will activate the system.
Testing the Alarm
How the System Alarm is Activated
To test the alarm, do the following:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described in the previous
procedure. The doors and liftgate should be
locked with the key or remote keyless
entry transmitter. Be sure to wait until the
indicator light starts flashing.
3. Unlock the driver’s door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.
The system will activate the alarm under the
following conditions:
• If the driver’s or front passenger’s door is
unlocked or if any of the other doors or
the liftgate is forcibly opened without the key
or remote keyless entry transmitter.
• If the battery terminal is disconnected and
then reconnected.
• If the ignition is hot-wired.
• If the side window glass is broken or damaged.
4. Stop the alarm as described in the disarming
procedure following.
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors. Also
check that the system is activated when the
battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
If the system does not work properly, have it
checked by your dealer.
The indicator light will come on when the
system is activated.
If the driver’s or front passenger’s doors are
unlocked without using the key or remote keyless
entry transmitter, the other doors and the
liftgate will be automatically locked again.
After one minute the alarm will automatically stop
and the indicator light will start flashing again.
101
Reactivating the System
Once the system is set, it will automatically reset
the alarm after the alarm stops. The alarm will
activate again under the same conditions as
described earlier.
Disarming the System
The alarm can be disarmed by doing one of the
following:
• Turn the ignition key from LOCK to ON.
• Unlock any of the doors with the key or with
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
If the liftgate or liftglass is opened with the
key, the system will still be activated.
102
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do
not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 261 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it
to four different positions.
(A) LOCK: This is the only position from which you
can remove the key. This locks your steering wheel,
ignition and automatic transaxle. Push in the
ignition switch as you turn the key toward you.
If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and
you cannot turn it, be sure you are using the
correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then
turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. Turn the key only with your
hand. Using a tool to force it could break the
key or the ignition switch. If none of these work,
then your vehicle needs service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the
key to LOCK and removing it will lock the
steering column and result in a loss of
ability to steer the vehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you need to turn the
engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key only to ACC. Do not push the
key in while the vehicle is moving.
(B) ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates
some of your electrical accessories, such as
the radio, but not the ventilation fan. It unlocks the
steering wheel and ignition. To move the key
from ACC to LOCK, push in the key and then turn
it to LOCK.
103
(C) ON: This is the position the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the switch.
The switch stays in the ON position when the
engine is running. But even when the ignition is not
running, you can use ON to operate your electrical
accessories, including the ventilation fan and
115 volt power outlet, and to display some warning
and indicator lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in
the ACC or On position with the engine off. You
may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
(D) START: This position starts the engine. When
the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch will return to ON for normal driving.
When the engine is not running, ACC and ON
allow you to operate some of your electrical
accessories.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s
door when the ignition is still in ACC or LOCK
and the key is in the ignition.
104
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember
to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
Starting the Engine
Place the transaxle in the proper gear.
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position — this is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in the neutral position
and the parking brake engaged. Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not all
the way down. That is a safety feature.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will
go down as your engine gets warm. Do
not race the engine immediately after starting
it. Operate the engine and transaxle gently
to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate
all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects components. If
the ignition key is turned to the START position,
and then released when the engine begins
cranking, the engine will continue cranking for a
few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the
engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be
stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACC or LOCK position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down.
105
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding it
there as you hold the key in START for up to
a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transaxle gently until the
oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
106
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your dealer. If you do not, your engine might
not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater can help. You will get
easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater
should be plugged in a minimum of four hours
prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is
not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The electrical cord is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
{CAUTION:
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
107
Automatic Transaxle Operation
There are several
different positions for
your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It
is the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
(Continued)
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 115. If you are pulling
a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 261.
Make sure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
CAUTION:
108
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your
regular brakes first and then press the shift lever
button before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift
lever, push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and move the shift lever into the gear
you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle) on page 117.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 252.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running at
high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running at
high speed may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at
high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
109
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If
you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 27 mph (43 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about
halfway down.
• Going about 29 mph (47 km/h) or more, push
your accelerator pedal all the way down. You
will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see
Skidding under Loss of Control on page 237.
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
more than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.
You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help
control your speed as you go down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use your
brakes off and on.
110
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than SECOND (2) without using your
brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift into low gear
until the vehicle is going slow enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. If
you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When
stopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parking
brake to hold the vehicle in place.
Overdrive Off
Manual Transaxle Operation
Vehicles with an automatic transaxle have an O/D
(overdrive off) button located on the left side of
the shift lever.
Five-Speed Transaxle
When you turn on your vehicle overdrive will
automatically come on until you turn it off.
Press the O/D button to
turn overdrive off or on.
A light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on
when the overdrive is on.
See Overdrive Off Light
on page 174.
Drive your vehicle with the overdrive on for better
fuel economy and quieter driving.
FIRST (1): Press the
clutch pedal and shift
into FIRST (1). Then,
slowly let up on the
clutch pedal as you
press the accelerator
pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going
less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),
put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on
the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then
shift into FIRST (1).
111
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let
up on the accelerator pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on the
clutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let
up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on
the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,
press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,
and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
112
Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parking
brake for parking your vehicle.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift,
you could lose control of your vehicle.
You could injure yourself or others. Do
not shift down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
This chart shows when to shift to the next gear for
the best fuel economy.
Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift
Speeds
Engine
1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
or
or
or
or
or
2 to 1 3 to 2 4 to 3 5 to 4 6 to 5
1.8 L
15 mph 25 mph 40 mph 45 mph
—
(Code 8) 24 km/h 40 km/h 64 km/h 72 km/h
If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or if
the engine is not running smoothly, you should
downshift to the next lower gear. You may have to
downshift two or more gears to keep the engine
running smoothly or for good performance.
113
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the
ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on.
Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in
as you move the lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 261.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake
pedal down.
114
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 261.
To shift into PARK (P), do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake by pulling up on the
parking brake lever.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding
in the button on the shift lever and pushing
the lever all the way toward the front of
the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
115
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave your
vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your automatic transaxle
vehicle with the engine running, be sure your
vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is
firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved
the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
116
Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift into
PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking
brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before
you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 115.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever
out of PARK (P) before you release the parking
brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in ON. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 108.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever – push the shift lever all the
way into PARK (P) and release the shift lever
button as you maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and move the
shift lever into the gear you wish.
Shift Lock Release
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still
cannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:
2. Carefully pry the
cover from the shift
lock override,
located to the right
of the shift lever.
3. Insert the end of a flat-tipped tool into the
round slot and press down firmly.
4. While maintaining brake application, move the
shift lever into the drive gear you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.
1. Turn the ignition to LOCK. Make sure the
parking brake is applied.
117
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shift
lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the
parking brake. Once the shift lever has been
placed into REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal
pressed in, you can turn the ignition key to LOCK,
remove the key and release the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 261.
Evaporation Pump
Your vehicle is equipped with a vacuum pump for
the vehicle’s fuel evaporation system. This
pump performs a fuel evaporation leakage test
approximately five hours after the engine is turned
off. You may hear a sound coming from
underneath the rear cargo compartment for
several minutes.
The noise is normal and does not signify a
malfunction. See your dealer with any questions.
118
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
CAUTION:
has been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
119
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 119.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 248.
120
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set your parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 115.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 261.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
While sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind
your vehicle. Move the mirror in the center to
move it up or down and side to side.
The control at the bottom of the mirror is the
day/night feature that allows adjustment to
the mirror so that the glare of headlamps from
behind is reduced. Pull the control for night driving
to reduce glare; push it to return to the day
position.
The mirror may have map lights beneath the
mirror. Press the switch to turn each light
on or off.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
The vehicle may have an inside rearview mirror
with OnStar®. See your dealer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
See OnStar® System on page 123 for information
on the services OnStar® provides.
While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the
mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Move the mirror in the center to move it
up or down and side to side. The control at
the bottom of the mirror is the day/night feature
that allows adjustment to the mirror so that
the glare of headlamps from behind is reduced.
Move the control from left to right for day or night
conditions.
121
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Outside Remote Control Mirrors
While sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind
your vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to move
it up or down and side to side.
Your vehicle has outside power adjustable mirrors.
The mirror may have an automatic dimming
feature that darkens gradually to reduce the glare
of headlamps from behind. When the ignition
key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear view
mirror always turns on in the automatic function
mode. An indicator light located on the mirror
will come on to show you that the function is on.
When the inside air temperature is low, it may take
a little longer for the mirror to darken in response
to the detection of headlights. Press the button
in the center of the mirror to turn this feature
on or off.
One photocell on the front of the mirror senses
when it is becoming dark outside. Another
photocell, facing rearward, senses headlamps
behind you.
To keep the photocells operating well, occasionally
clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.
122
The controls are located
to the left of the steering
wheel on the instrument
panel.
To adjust either mirror, push the button labeled
L (left) or R (right). Use the arrows on the control
pad to adjust the direction of the mirror. Once
both mirrors have been adjusted, move the
selector switch back to the center. This prevents
the mirrors from being moved once they have been
adjusted.
Outside Convex Mirror
OnStar® System
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be
seen from the driver’s seat.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they
can contact Roadside Service for you.
123
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may
cancel your OnStar® service at any time by
contacting OnStar® as provided below. A complete
OnStar® Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Terms
and Conditions are included in the vehicle’s
OnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For more
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,
contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or
press the OnStar® button to speak with an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe
& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®
Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year, or upgrade to the Directions &
Connections® Plan.
124
For more information, press the OnStar® button to
speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar®.
Available Services with Safe &
Sound® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification
(AACN) (If equipped)
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
•
•
•
•
•
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used
with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on
eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes
to access location-based weather, local traffic
reports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phone
button and giving a few simple voice commands,
you can browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for more
information. (Only available in the
continental U.S.)
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact with OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
125
How OnStar® Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle
information usually includes your GPS location
and, in the event of a crash, additional information
regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,
your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS
location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar® service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar® has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service.
126
Not all services are available everywhere,
particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
that place as well.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by a dealer. If the light appears
clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the blue OnStar® button to confirm that your
OnStar® equipment is active.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling up on the bottom of
the handle.
Cupholder(s)
There are two fixed cupholders located in the
console area between the two front seats. There
are also two cupholders that fold out of the rear of
the console storage unit.
Coinholder(s)
Your instrument panel may have a coinholder
located to the left of the steering wheel and on the
center console near the parking brake.
Instrument Panel Storage Area
There are storage compartments located on the
instrument panel in two places. They are below the
interior/instrument panel brightness dial and
below the shift lever. Pull the top of the door
toward you to open it or for the compartment below
the shift lever, push the button to open it.
Center Console Storage Area
A storage area is located in the console between
the seats.
To access the storage area, pull up the lock
release lever while raising the lid.
Floor Mats
The driver’s side floor mat is held in place by
two locator hooks.
Be sure the driver’s side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.
127
How to Remove and Replace the
Floor Mat
To remove the floor
mat, pull up on the rear
of the mat to disconnect
it from the locator
hooks.
To reinstall the floor mat, line up the openings in
the floor mat over the locator hooks and push
down into place.
128
Rear Storage Area
A storage area is located under the rear cargo
area floor panel.
Turn the knobs on the
floor panel to unlock the
storage area access
cover.
Be sure to lock the access cover to close it
securely.
Rear Cargo Accessory Track
System
Your vehicle has a track system located on the
floor of the rear cargo area. This system can
be used to carry accessories in your vehicle in
many ways by using the tie-down anchors
provided in your vehicle or accessory packages
available from your GM dealer.
Make sure the cargo being carried in the rear
cargo area is secure. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 253.
Cargo Cover
To use the cargo cover, loosen the straps and
attach the side hooks of the cargo cover to
the upper tie down hooks located along both sides
of the rear cargo area. Pull straps to adjust.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could
be thrown about the vehicle during a
collision or sudden maneuver. You or
others could be injured. If you remove the
cover, always store it in the proper
storage location. When you put it back,
always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
129
Cargo Tie Downs
The tire tie-down straps are designed to secure a
flat tire. You can also use the straps and hooks
to secure your luggage.
There are eight tie-down hooks located in the rear
of the vehicle. The straps are located under the
cargo area floor panel. To use the straps, hook the
ends to the lower tie-down hooks in a criss-cross
pattern across the cargo. Pull on the straps at
the buckle to tighten the straps as needed.
130
Sunroof
If the vehicle has a sunroof, it can be opened or
put in a tilt position. To tilt the sunroof, slide
the sunshade rearward, then press the switch
marked UP. Press the other end of the switch to
lower the sunroof. The ignition must be in the
ON position for the switch to work.
To open or close the sunroof, press the switch
marked SLIDE rearward or forward. The sunroof
will close partially and stop. Once the sunroof
stops, release the switch and press the button
again to fully close it. The sunroof can be opened
to any position. The sunshade will open when
the sunroof is opened. The sunshade must
be closed manually.
131
✍ NOTES
132
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 136
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 138
Other Warning Devices ............................. 138
Horn .......................................................... 138
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 139
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 139
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 140
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 140
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 141
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 141
Windshield Washer .................................... 142
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 142
Cruise Control ........................................... 143
Exterior Lamps .......................................... 146
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 146
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 147
Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 147
Fog Lamps ................................................ 148
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 148
Interior Lamps Control ............................... 149
Entry Lighting ............................................ 149
Reading Lamps ......................................... 150
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 150
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current .................................................. 151
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 151
Climate Controls ......................................... 152
Climate Control System ............................. 152
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 155
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 156
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 158
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 159
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 160
Trip Odometers ......................................... 160
Tachometer ............................................... 161
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 161
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 162
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 163
Charging System Light .............................. 165
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 166
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 167
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light .............. 167
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light ........................................ 168
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 168
133
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 169
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 170
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 173
Lights On Reminder .................................. 174
Taillamp Indicator Light ............................. 174
Cruise Control Light .................................. 174
Overdrive Off Light .................................... 174
Highbeam On Light ................................... 175
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ............... 175
Door Ajar Light .......................................... 175
Fuel Gage ................................................. 176
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 177
134
Audio System(s) ......................................... 177
Setting the Time ........................................ 178
Radio with CD (Base Level) ...................... 179
Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 188
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 198
Using an MP3 ........................................... 210
XM Radio Messages ................................. 216
Radio Reception ........................................ 218
Care of Your CDs ..................................... 219
Care of the CD Player .............................. 219
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 219
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 219
✍ NOTES
135
Instrument Panel Overview
136
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on
page 155.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 159.
C. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 152.
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 138.
E. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 177.
F. Rear Window Defogger Button. See “Rear
Window Defogger” under Climate Control
System on page 152.
G. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 163.
Front Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light.
See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 161.
H. Power Remote Control Mirror Button. See
Outside Remote Control Mirrors on page 122.
I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 148.
J. Rear Liftglass Release Button. See
Liftgate/Liftglass on page 96.
K. Tire Pressure Monitor Reset Button. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 330.
L. Coinholder. See Coinholder(s) on page 127.
M. TRAC OFF Button. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 230.
N. Content Theft-Deterrent Security Light. See
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 100.
O. Storage Compartment. See Instrument Panel
Storage Area on page 127.
P. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever and Exterior
Lamp Stalk. See Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 139 and Exterior Lamps
on page 146.
Q. Hood Release. See Hood Release on
page 280.
R. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 139.
S. Horn. See Horn on page 138.
T. Cruise Control Lever (Option). See Cruise
Control on page 143.
U. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on
page 103.
137
V. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield
Wipers on page 141.
W. Cigarette Lighter or Accessory Power Outlet.
See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on
page 151 or Accessory Power Outlet(s) on
page 150.
X. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation
on page 108 or Manual Transaxle Operation
on page 111.
Y. Power Outlet. See Power Outlet 115 Volt
Alternating Current on page 151.
Z. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on
page 114.
AA. Center Console Storage Area. See Center
Console Storage Area on page 127.
AB. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 127.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition switch.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals do not work.
Other Warning Devices
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the
police and others that you have a problem. The
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on
and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set
them up at the side of the road about 300 feet
(100 m) behind your vehicle.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on your
steering wheel pad to sound the horn.
138
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt steering column allows you to adjust the
steering column before you drive. You can also
raise it to the highest level to give your legs more
room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The tilt lever is located
underneath, on the left
side of the steering
wheel column.
To tilt the column, move the lever downward.
Adjust the steering wheel to a comfortable position,
then move the lever upward to lock the column
in place.
The turn signal/multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
This lever operates the following:
• Exterior Lamps. See Exterior Lamps on
page 146.
• Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 140.
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 140.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on
page 141.
• Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 148.
139
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has an upward (for right) and a
downward (for left) position. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return
by itself when you release it.
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
If a bulb is burned out, have it replaced to help
avoid an accident. If the arrows do not go on at all
when you signal a turn, check for burned-out
bulbs and then check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 365.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The headlamps must be on for this feature to
work. For high beams, push the turn signal lever
away from you.
When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel
cluster also will be on.
It will go off when you switch to the low beams. To
switch back to low beams, pull the lever toward you.
If you signal a turn or a lane change and notice
the arrow flashing rapidly, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers will not see your
turn signal.
140
Flash-to-Pass
Move the lever to one of the following positions:
With the lever in the low-beam position, pull the
lever toward you to momentarily switch to
high beams (to signal that you are going to pass).
If you have the headlamps on when you release
the lever, they will return to the low beams.
MIST: Move the lever to MIST, for a single wiping
cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start, then
let go. The wipers will stop after one wipe.
Windshield Wipers
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to INT to
choose a delayed wiping cycle. The time between
wipes can be changed by turning the INT band.
Turn the band forward or rearward for a longer or
shorter delay interval. This position is useful in
light rain or snow, rather than continuous wiping.
OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn the
wipers off.
LO (Low): Move the lever to LO for steady
wiping at low speed.
HI (High): Move the lever to HI for steady wiping
at high speed.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
controls the windshield wipers and washer.
REAR: Turn the end of the lever upward to LO or
HI, to turn on the rear window wiper. The wiper
does not work with the rear liftglass open.
141
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they are frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If the
blades become damaged, get new blades or blade
inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. A
circuit breaker stops them until the motor cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
Pull the lever toward you to spray washer fluid on
the windshield. The spray will continue until
you release the lever. The wipers will run a few
times. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 305.
The knob automatically returns from the position
after you release it.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
142
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Turn the knob up or down as far as it will go, to
squirt washer fluid on the rear window. The
knob automatically returns from these positions
after it is released.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid
bottle as the windshield washer. However, the rear
window washer will run out of fluid before the
windshield washer. If you can wash the windshield
but not the rear window, check the fluid level.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
Cruise Control
If your vehicle has
cruise control, the lever
is located on the
right side of the steering
wheel.
Cruise control, lets you maintain a speed of
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. This can really help
on long trips. Cruise control does not work at
speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
143
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do
not want to. You could be startled and
even lose control. Keep the cruise control
switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
1. Press the ON-OFF button at the end of the
cruise control lever. The CRUISE light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on. See
Cruise Control Light on page 174 for more
information.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Move the lever down to −SET and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
144
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This shuts
off cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.
If the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or
greater, push the lever up to +RES
(Resume/Accelerate). The vehicle returns to the
previously set speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are three ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Move the lever down to −SET.
Release the lever and the accelerator pedal.
You will now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise lever up to +RES. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed desired,
and then release the lever.
• To increase the vehicle speed in very small
amounts, move the lever to +RES briefly
and then release it. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while
using cruise control:
• Push and hold the lever to −SET until you reach
the lower speed desired, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
lever down briefly. Each time this is done, the
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed
you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness
of the hills.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed
down. Of course, applying the brake or
downshifting to SECOND (2) or LOW (L) turns off
the cruise control. Many drivers find this to be
too much trouble and do not use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are several ways to turn off the cruise
control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal or push the
clutch pedal, if you have a manual transaxle.
• Press the ON-OFF button again.
• Pull the cruise control lever toward you.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the
ignition, the cruise control set speed memory
is erased.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle
speed.
145
Exterior Lamps
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
O (Exterior Lamps): Turn the outside part of the
lever with the symbol on it, to operate the lamps.
For vehicles sold in the U. S., this symbol will
appear on the instrument panel cluster when your
exterior lamps are on.
The exterior lamp switch has three positions:
OFF: Turning the switch to this position turns off
all lamps, except the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
146
O (Parking Lamps): Turning the switch to this
position turns on the parking lamps together
with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamp
• Instrument Panel Lights
A symbol will appear on the instrument panel
cluster when your parking lamps are on.
See Lights On Reminder on page 174 and
Taillamp Indicator Light on page 174 for additional
information.
3 (Headlamps): Turning the switch to this
position turns on the headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps and lights.
Headlamps on Reminder
If you turn the ignition to LOCK or ACC and leave
the lamps on, you will hear a tone when you
open the driver’s door.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make the headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when the
following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on with the engine running.
• The exterior lamps switch is off.
• The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only the headlamps will be
on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps,
sidemarker and other lamps will not be on. The
instrument panel will not be lit up either.
When you turn the exterior lamp switch to the
headlamp position, the DRL will go off and
the headlamps will come on. The other lamps that
come on with the headlamps will also come on.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular
headlamps. See “Automatic Headlamp System”
following.
When you turn the exterior lamp switch off, the
regular lamps will go off and the headlamps
will change to the reduced brightness of DRL
provided it is not dark outside. DRL also comes on
if only the parking lamps are being used.
Automatic Headlamp System
Your vehicle has an automatic light sensor on the
top left corner of the instrument panel, so be
sure it is not covered or the headlamps will be on
continuously.
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic
headlamp system will turn on the low-beam
headlamps at the normal brightness along with
other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps and instrument panel lights. This is
indicated by the headlamp symbol on your
instrument panel cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 159.
147
If you are driving through a parking garage,
overcast weather, or a tunnel, the automatic
headlamp system may turn on the low-beam
headlamps at a normal brightness along with the
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will be
dimmer, and the instrument panel cluster
lights may dim. There will be a delay before the
lights will turn on when starting the car at night.
Fog Lamps
- (Fog Lamps): Turn the band on the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the fog lamp symbol to
turn the fog lamps on. They will come on only
when the headlamps are on low beam.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The instrument panel
brightness control is
located to the left of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
Turn the wheel on the
left of the control
up or down to increase
or decrease brightness.
Turn the wheel all the way up for the maximum
setting. It is recommended that the brightness level
be kept at the maximum setting for all daytime
driving to ensure proper visibility.
The brightness of the instrument panel lights will
decrease when the headlamps are on.
148
Interior Lamps Control
Entry Lighting
The interior lights control is located on the
overhead light. To change the interior lights
setting, slide the switch to one of the following
positions:
While the interior lights control is in the door
position, the light will come on when any side door,
the liftgate or the liftglass is opened. After all the
doors, liftgate and liftglass are closed, and the key
is out of the ignition, in LOCK or ACC, the light
will remain on for about 15 seconds and then
go out except under the following conditions:
• The ignition is turned to ACC or ON after all
the doors, the liftgate and the liftglass are
closed.
• All the doors and liftgate are locked when the
liftglass is closed and the light is still on.
OFF: This position turns the light off.
ON: This position keeps the light on all the time.
Door: This position turns the light on when
any door, the liftgate or the liftglass is opened.
The light goes off when all the side doors,
the liftgate and the liftglass are closed.
When any door is unlocked with the key or remote
keyless entry system transmitter, the light comes
on for 15 seconds, even if the door is not opened.
149
Reading Lamps
If your vehicle has a sunroof, there will be a reading
lamp near the sunroof switch. Press the button to
turn the lamp on and press it again to turn it off.
If your vehicle does not have a sunroof, the
vehicle’s inside rearview mirror may have reading
lamps. If your vehicle has reading lamps, there
are two buttons located on the bottom of the
mirror. Press the buttons to turn the lamps on and
press them again to turn the lamps off.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With the accessory power outlet, you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment.
Your vehicle has an outlet under the climate
controls.
To use the outlet, the ignition must be in ON or
ACC. Pull down the small cover to access
the outlet.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
turn off electrical equipment when not in
use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds
the maximum amperage rating.
150
This circuit is protected by a fuse and has a
maximum current level. Do not use equipment
exceeding the maximum amperage rating.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be
compatible to the power accessory outlet and could
result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you
experience a problem see your dealer for additional
information on the power accessory plugs.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not use equipment exceeding maximum
amperage rating of 20 amperes. Check with
your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the proper installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current
With this power outlet, you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment with a maximum limit of
115 VAC. If you try to use equipment that requires
more than the limit, a protection circuit will cut
the power supply. The power will automatically
restart when equipment that operates within
the limit is plugged in.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and they may not work
properly:
• Equipment with high initial peak
wattage: cathode-ray tube type televisions,
compressor-driven refrigerators, electric
power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply: microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
The power outlet is located near the center of the
instrument panel. Before using the outlet, turn
on the ignition and press the button next to
the outlet. An indicator light in the button will come
on. After using the outlet, press the button again
to turn it off.
To use the lighter, if your vehicle has one, push
the lighter in all the way and let go. When it
is ready, it will pop back out by itself. If the engine
is not running, the key must be in ACC to use
the lighter.
151
It is not recommended to use the cigarette lighter
to plug in auxiliary electrical equipment. Use
the accessory power outlet for phones and other
electrical equipment. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 150 or Power Outlet 115 Volt
Alternating Current on page 151.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating does not let the lighter back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating.
Your vehicle may have a removable ashtray that
sits in your front cupholder in the center console
storage area.
Operation
9 (Fan): Turn the center knob away from OFF to
turn the system on. Turn the knob toward HI to
increase fan speed.
If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment
air filter may need to be replaced. For more
information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter
on page 156 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 377.
152
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the upper instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the upper
instrument panel outlets, and to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets
and to the outboard outlets (for the side windows).
? (Recirculation): Press this button, located
in the center of the instrument panel to the
left of the audio system, to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. This mode recirculates the
air inside the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or
to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle
more quickly. When the button is pressed,
an indicator light in the button comes on. Press
the button again to turn off recirculate and to
circulate outside air through the system.
The indicator light will go off. Recirculate is
automatically turned off when the climate control
system mode knob is turned to defog or defrost or
is between modes.
Temperature Control: Turn the right knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button, located
in the center of the instrument panel to the left
of the audio system, to turn the air-conditioning
system on or off. When A/C is pressed, an
indicator light in the button comes on to let you
know that the air conditioning is activated.
MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): Press
the A/C and recirculation buttons at the same time
to select MAX A/C.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside
air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce
the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It
also helps the system to operate more efficiently.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you might notice a small amount
of water dripping underneath your vehicle
while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
153
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to
clear fog or frost from the windshield. Use the defog
mode to clear the inside of the windshield of fog or
moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost
mode to remove fog or frost from the outside of the
windshield more quickly.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
clear fog from the rear window.
- (Defog): Air is directed between the
windshield, side windows, instrument panel outlets
and the floor outlets. The air-conditioning
compressor will run automatically in this setting
without pressing A/C, unless the outside
temperature is at or below 32°F (0°C).
1 (Defrost): Air is directed to the windshield,
instrument panel outlets and the side windows.
The air-conditioning compressor will run
automatically in this setting without pressing A/C,
unless the outside temperature is at or below
32°F (0°C).
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
154
The rear window
defogger button is
located on the center of
the instrument panel,
above the audio system.
The defogger does
not operate with the rear
liftglass opened.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in the ON position.
= (Rear Defogger): Press the defogger button
to turn the rear window defogger on or off. An
indicator light in the button comes on to let
you know that the rear window defogger is
activated. Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off
automatically approximately 15 minutes after the
button is pressed. The defogger can also be turned
off by pressing the button again or by turning off
the engine.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions may damage
the rear defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and
outboard sides of the instrument panel, to change
the direction of the air flowing through the vents.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air
filter may need to be replaced. For more
information, see “Passenger Compartment Air
Filter” following and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 377.
155
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The access panel for the air filter is behind the
glove box. To replace the filter, follow these steps:
Passenger compartment air, both outside and
recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment air filter. The filter removes certain
contaminants from the air, including pollen
and dust particles. Reductions in airflow, which
may occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicate
that the filter needs to be replaced early. An
air filter is available through your dealer. For how
often to change the air filter, see Scheduled
Maintenance on page 377.
1. Lower the glove box door and remove the
screw on the right side of the glovebox with
a tool. Slide the arm of the glovebox off.
2. Push each side of the glovebox in and pull
toward you.
156
3. Lift the snaps on the filter cover to remove the
cover.
4. Remove the air filter.
5. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.
It will not cause damage to your vehicle if you
choose not to replace the air filter after removing
it. However, the air coming into your vehicle
will not be filtered.
157
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will
help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to your warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
you will see in the details on the next few
pages, some warning lights come on briefly when
you start the engine just to let you know they’re
working. If you are familiar with this section,
you should not be alarmed when this happens.
158
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Often gages and warning lights work together to
let you know when there’s a problem with
your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on when you are driving, or when one of
the gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about it.
Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous. So
please get to know your warning lights and gages.
They are a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, how much fuel is left in the fuel tank and many other things you need to drive
safely and economically.
United States Cluster shown, Canada similar
159
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometers
The speedometer lets you see your vehicle’s
speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h). The odometer shows how far
your vehicle has been driven.
The trip odometers can tell you how far your
vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip
odometer to zero.
If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,
the new one must be set to the mileage total of the
old odometer. If it cannot, then it is set at zero
and a label must be put on the driver’s door
to show the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed. See your dealer for more
information.
The button located on
the right side of the
instrument panel cluster
allows you to switch
between the odometer
and the two trip
odometers.
Press the button once to switch to TRIP A and
again to switch to TRIP B. To return the display to
the odometer reading, press the trip odometer
button again.
To set the trip odometers to zero, press and hold
the button.
160
Temperature Display
Tachometer
The tachometer shows
engine speed in
thousands of revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The outside air temperature is displayed on the
center of the instrument panel, within the
speedometer. The display will show the outside air
temperature in Fahrenheit with a range from
−22°F to 122°F (−30°C to 50°C).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime
will come on for several seconds to remind
people to fasten their safety belts, unless the
driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your
vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
operate the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
The safety belt light will
also flash until the
driver’s belt is buckled.
If the driver’s belt is
already buckled, neither
the chime nor the
light will come on.
161
Your vehicle also has a safety belt reminder light
for the right front passenger position.
This light is located on
the center of the
instrument panel, above
the audio system.
When the key is turned to ON or START, this light
will come on as a reminder for the right front
passenger to fasten their safety belt. This light will
flash until the right front passenger’s safety belt
is buckled. The passenger’s safety belt reminder
light will not come on if the right front passenger’s
belt is already buckled or if a sensor does not
detect the weight of a passenger in that seat.
If something is placed on the right front passenger
seat, the sensors in the seat may detect that
object and cause the right front passenger safety
belt reminder light to come on. If this happens,
remove the object.
162
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system monitors the airbag
sensor assembly, front airbag sensors,
seat-mounted side impact and roof-mounted airbag
sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat
belt buckle switch, right front occupant sensing
system and indicator light, front passenger’s seat
belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and
power sources. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 63.
This light will come on
briefly when you start
your vehicle, then
it should go out. This
means the system
is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on or
keeps flashing after you start your
vehicle, it means the airbag system and
safety belt pretension system may not be
working properly. The airbags in your
vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle serviced right away if the
airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has a passenger airbag status
indicator in the instrument panel.
The indicator next to the
passenger airbag status
indicator lights is the
passenger safety
belt reminder light.
See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 161 for
more information on that indicator.
When the ignition key is turned to ON, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF if there is weight
on the seat or if the safety belt is buckled, to let you
know the status of the right front passenger’s frontal
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
163
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with a
rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, whenever
possible.
164
If the word ON is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped). A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if
the right front passenger’s airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF is lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped). See Passenger Sensing System on
page 74 for information about the conditions that
may affect the airbag system and also important
safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger seat may not have the
protection of an airbag. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 162.
Charging System Light
This light comes on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, with the
engine not running, as a
check to show you it
is working.
It should go out when the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging
system. It could indicate that you have a loose
generator drive belt or another electrical problem.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the
charging system light on, be certain to turn
off all your accessories, such as the radio and
air conditioner.
165
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
United States
Canada
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this light
should come on when you turn the key to START.
If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
166
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your
parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking
brake does not release fully. If it stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice
that the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may
go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
for service. See Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light on page 167 and Towing Your
Vehicle on page 259.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
The ABS warning light comes on briefly when you
turn the ignition key to ON. This is normal. If
the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light should come
on briefly as you start
the engine.
United States
Canada
With the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), this light
comes on when the engine is started and can
stay on for several seconds. This is normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. If
the light comes on while you are driving, stop
as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then
start the engine again to reset the system. If
the light still stays on, or comes on again while
you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If the
regular brake system warning light is not on,
you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light
is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 166.
It will then come on only when a low tire pressure
condition exists.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 330
for more information.
167
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
This light should come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
If it stays on or comes on while you are driving,
there is a problem with your Traction Control
System (TCS).
The TCS warning light comes on briefly when the
ignition is turned to ON. It will come on again
when you press the TRAC OFF button to turn off
the TCS. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 230 for more information.
In the following cases, contact your dealer:
• The indicator light does not come on when the
ignition is turned to ON.
• The indicator light remains on after the ignition
is turned ON.
• The indicator light comes on with the normal
driving mode while driving.
168
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
This light warns that
there is a problem with
the Traction Control
System (TCS) or
the Vehicle Stability
Control (VSC) system.
The light will come on when the ignition is turned
to ON and will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the system
does not work. However, as conventional braking
operates when applied, there is no problem to
continue driving.
In the following cases, contact your dealer:
• The warning light does not come on after the
ignition is turned to ON.
• The warning light remains on after the ignition
is turned to ON.
• The warning light comes on while driving.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The TCS light will come on when the VSC system
warning light comes on, even if the TRAC OFF
button is not pressed.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 231 for more
information on Vehicle Stability Control System.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 230
for more information.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area,
the engine is too hot. It means that the engine has
overheated. Pull off the road, stop your vehicle,
and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 297.
169
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
United States
Canada
Your vehicle has a computer which monitors
operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control
systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on
to indicate that there is a problem and service is
required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is also designed to assist your service
technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
170
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel
economy might not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This could lead
to costly repairs that might not be covered by
your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or replacement tires that do not
match your vehicle’s original tires can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and may
cause this light to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This may also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 272.
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
of cargo being hauled as soon as it is
possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You also may be able to correct the emission
system malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 277.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips
with the cap properly installed should turn the
light off.
171
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 274. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
172
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
Check Engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that
critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if you have recently replaced your
battery or if your battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving.
This may take several days of routine driving. If you
have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,
your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
If there is a problem
with the oil, this light
may stay on after
you start the engine or
come on while you
are driving.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
This indicates that there is not enough oil pressure
to keep the engine properly lubricated and cool.
The engine could be low on oil, or have some
other oil related problem. Have it fixed right away.
The oil light could also come on in three other
situations.
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light comes on as a test to
show you it is working, but the light goes out
when you turn the ignition to START. If it
does not come on with the ignition on,
you could have a problem with the fuse or
bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a
stop, the light could blink on and off. Have
it checked at your dealer.
• If you make a hard stop, the light could come
on for a moment. Have it checked at your
dealer.
173
Lights On Reminder
This light comes on
whenever the headlights
are on.
See Headlamps on Reminder on page 146 for
more information.
Taillamp Indicator Light
This light will come on
when your taillamps
are on.
Cruise Control Light
The CRUISE light
comes on whenever you
press the ON-OFF
button to set your cruise
control.
See Cruise Control Light on page 174 for more
information.
Overdrive Off Light
The automatic transaxle
has overdrive. This light
comes on whenever
you turn off the
overdrive.
Canada Only
See Exterior Lamps on page 146 for more
information.
174
See Overdrive Off on page 111 for more
information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
Door Ajar Light
This light will come on if
any door, the rear
liftgate or the rear
liftglass are not
completely closed.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 140.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light will come on
when your windshield
washer fluid is low.
Canada Only
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 305 for
more information.
175
Fuel Gage
United States
Canada
The fuel gage shows about how much fuel is in
your fuel tank. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates
that the fuel filler door is on the driver side of
your vehicle. The fuel gage works only when the
ignition switch is ON. When the gage first indicates
E or empty, you still have a little fuel left, about
1 or 2 gallons (3.8 L or 7.6 L), but you need to get
more right away. When your vehicle is low on
fuel the low fuel warning light, located below the
empty mark, will also come on to remind you
to add fuel.
176
Here are five things some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads F or full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage
may have indicated the tank was half full, but
it actually took more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill it.
• It takes the gage several minutes to read F or
full after filling the vehicle with fuel.
• The gage moves a little when you turn, stop
or speed up.
• The gage does not go back to E or empty
when you turn off the ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light is located on
the fuel gage and
comes on when the fuel
tank is low on fuel.
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel
on page 274 for more information.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
page 222. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
177
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. Here are some ways in which you can
help avoid distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD
player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way
radio, make sure that it can be added by
checking with your dealer. Also, check federal
rules covering mobile radio and telephone
units. If sound equipment can be added, it is
very important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems
can interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
178
Setting the Time
The radio might have a button marked with an
H or HR to represent hours and an M or MIN to
represent minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct
hour displays. AM appears for morning hours.
Press and hold the minute button until the correct
minute displays. The time can be set with the
ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station
broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)
information, press and hold the hour and minute
buttons at the same time until UPDATED displays.
If the time is not available from the station, NO
UPDATE displays.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning
to an RDS broadcast station, it could take a
few minutes for the time to update.
Radio with CD (Base Level)
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). RDS features are available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
The radio has a theft-deterrent feature. A red light
blinks while the engine is off to indicate the
radio is protected. It will not operate if it is installed
in a different vehicle.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases, a
radio station can broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters display instead of the
frequency. RDS stations can also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
179
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the
volume.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to display the time
with the ignition off.
For RDS, push the RCL button to change what
displays while using RDS. The display options are
station, RDS station frequency, PTY (program
type), and the name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL button
while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different
categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category
or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, push the
RCL button until the desired option displays, then
hold the button until the display flashes. The
selected display becomes the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
display shows the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
180
w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio seeks stations only with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for two seconds until SCAN displays and a
beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop
scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until
PSCAN and the preset number displays. A double
beep sounds. The radio goes to the first preset
station stored on your pushbuttons, plays for
a few seconds, then goes to the next preset
station. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop
scanning presets.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the
station that was set returns and the
equalization that was selected is stored for
that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
181
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS,
MID (midrange), or TREB (treble) displays. The
SELECT LED indicator lights to show that the tone
control can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob
to increase or to decrease the tone. If a station is
weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To return all of the tone controls to the middle
position press and hold the TONE button
until FLAT displays.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select
customized equalization settings.
Up to six customized equalization settings, can be
programmed, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob
to create the equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # displays and the EQ symbol
flashes.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select
the EQ number.
182
5. Press and hold the EQ button to store the
equalization setting and the number. EQ
SAVED displays and a beep sounds.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings
and numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use
with talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
this button until BAL (balance) displays. The
SELECT LED indicator lights to show that
the speakers can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT
knob to move the sound toward the right or
the left speakers.
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and
the rear speakers, press and release this
button until FADE displays. The SELECT LED
indicator lights to show that the speakers can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To return all speaker settings to the middle
position, press and hold the BAL FADE button
for two seconds.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol displays.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow to select the PTY and
take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and
the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK
arrow once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
either SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY
and then to go to another station.
5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the
display, go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio searches
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
w SCAN x: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol displays.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY displays, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio
begins scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio scans
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate
frequency lets the radio switch to a stronger FM
station with the same program type. To turn
alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for
two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio can
switch to FM stations with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.
The radio does not switch to stronger FM stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
183
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
RDS Messages
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up
to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national
emergencies. When an alert announcement
comes on the current radio station, ALERT!
displays. You will hear the announcement, even if
the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is
playing, play stops during the announcement. Alert
announcements cannot be turned off.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported
by all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO displays. Press this button to
see the message. The message can display the
artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message displays every three seconds. To
scroll through the message, press and release the
INFO button. A new group of words displays
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message displays, INFO disappears from the
display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. The last message is shown until
a new message is received or you tune to a
different station.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol displays.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY
that was set returns, if program type select
mode is on.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
184
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tuned
station broadcasts traffic announcements. Press
this button to receive the traffic announcement
from the station. TRAF inside brackets displays.
When a traffic announcement broadcasts on
the tuned radio station, you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio seeks to a station that does. When a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements is found,
the radio stops seeking and TRAF inside brackets
displays. If no station is found that broadcasts
traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets
or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go
to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements.
If no station is found that broadcasts traffic
announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.
The radio plays the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio interrupts the play
of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
Radio Messages
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 216 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing. If you insert a CD with the radio off and
the ignition on, it starts to play.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,
the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
185
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 219 for more information.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
\1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release the
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time
of the track displays.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
186
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear
the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM and the track number displays. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release the pushbutton to
play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
displays.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select an
equalization setting while playing a CD. The
equalization is set when a CD is played. See “EQ”
listed previously for more information. If you
select an EQ setting for your CD, it is activated
each time a CD is played.
w SEEK x: Press the down arrow to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. Press the up arrow to go to the
next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the CD.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change the
default on the display, track, and elapsed time,
push the button until the desired option displays,
then hold the button until the display flashes.
The selected display becomes the default. While
elapsed time is showing, CD TIME displays.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. The CD symbol
displays when a CD is loaded.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
can be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs can be loaded with the ignition and radio
off if this button is pressed first.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow for
more than two seconds until SCAN and the track
number displays and a beep sounds. The CD
goes to the next track, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next track. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
187
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When
the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
188
Radio with CD (MP3)
The radio has a theft-deterrent feature. A red light
blinks while the engine is off to indicate the
radio is protected. It will not operate if it is installed
in a different vehicle.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Playing the Radio
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). RDS features are available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases, a
radio station can broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or the call letters display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations can also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program
being broadcast.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the
volume.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and
the time. When the ignition is turned off, push this
button to display the time.
To change the default on the display, push the
RCL button until the desired option displays, then
hold the button until the display flashes. The
selected display becomes the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The
display shows the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
189
w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for two seconds until SCAN displays and a
beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop
scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until
PSCAN and the preset number displays and a
double beep sounds. The radio goes to the
first preset station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next preset station. Press either
SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio scans stations only with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
190
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the
station that was set, returns and the
equalization that was selected is stored for
that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS,
MID (midrange), or TREB (treble) displays. The
SELECT LED indicator lights to show that the tone
control can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob
to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak
or has static, decrease the treble.
Pressing and holding the TONE button until FLAT
displays, returns all of the tone controls to the
middle position.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select
customized bass, midrange, and treble
equalization settings.
Up to six customized equalization settings, can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob
to create the desired equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # displays and the EQ symbol
flashes.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select
the desired EQ number.
5. Press and hold the EQ button to store the
equalization setting and the number. A
beep sounds and EQ SAVED displays.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings
and numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use
with talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
this button until BAL displays. The SELECT
LED indicator lights to show that the speakers can
be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move
the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and
the rear speakers, press and release this
button until FADE displays. The SELECT LED
indicator lights to show that the speakers can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for
two seconds returns all speaker settings to
the middle position.
191
Finding a Program Type (PTY)
Station (RDS)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol displays.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY displays, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and to take
you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, and
the PTY displays, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press either
SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the
display, go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio searches
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
192
w SCAN x: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol displays.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio begins
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio scans
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate
frequency lets the radio switch to a stronger FM
station with the same program type. To turn
alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for
two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio can
switch to FM stations with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.
The radio does not switch to stronger FM stations.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
RDS Messages
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up
to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national
emergencies. When an alert announcement
comes on the current radio station, ALERT!
displays. You will hear the announcement, even if
the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is
playing, play stops during the announcement. Alert
announcements cannot be turned off.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported
by all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO displays. Press this button to
see the message. The message can display the
artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message displays every three seconds. To
scroll through the message, press and release the
INFO button. A new group of words display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has displayed, the information symbol
disappears from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. The
last message is shown until a new message is
received or you tune to a different station.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol displays.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY
that was set, returns, if program type select
mode is activated.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
193
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tuned
station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the
tuned station, press this button. Brackets
are displayed around TRAF and when a traffic
announcement broadcasts on the tuned radio
station, you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio seeks to a station that does. When a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements is found,
the radio stops seeking and brackets are displayed
around TRAF. If no station is found that
broadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC
displays.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets
or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go
to a station that supports traffic announcements.
If no station is found that broadcasts traffic
announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.
The radio plays the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio interrupts the play
of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements and the brackets display.
194
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and READING DISC and the
CD symbol displays. If you want to insert a CD
with the ignition off, first press the eject button or
push the RCL button.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 219 for more information.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged
CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While
using the CD player, use only CDs in good
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
\ 1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed time
of the track displays.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
RDM 2 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear
the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM and the track number displays. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
# 3 (Next Folder): This button does not have a
function for non-MP3 CDs.
195
4 s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
displays.
6 ! (Previous Folder): This button does not
have a function for non-MP3 CDs.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired
customized equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization is automatically set
whenever a CD is played. See “EQ” listed
previously for more information.
w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Press the down arrow to go
to the start of the previous track. Pressing
either arrow for more than two seconds searches
the previous or next tracks at two tracks per
second. When the desired track number displays,
release the arrow to stop searching and to play
the track.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow for
more than two seconds until SCAN and the track
number displays and a beep sounds. The CD
goes to the next track, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next track. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change the
default on the display, track and elapsed time,
push the button until the desired option displays,
then hold the button until the display flashes.
The selected display is now the default. While
elapsed time displays, CD TIME displays.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. The CD symbol
displays when a CD is loaded.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
can be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs can be loaded with the radio and ignition
off if this button is pressed first.
196
Playing an MP3 CD-R Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3
feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playing
an MP3 CD-R disc. For more information on
how to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3
on page 210 later in this section.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See Using an MP3 on page 210 later in this
section.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
197
Radio with Six-Disc CD
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the
volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to display the
current radio station frequency. While the ignition
is off, press this button to display the time.
If your vehicle has the Monsoon audio system, it
includes seven speakers. The radio displays
MONSOON while the radio or the ignition is turned
on. See your dealer for details.
The radio has a theft-deterrent feature. A red light
blinks while the engine is off to indicate the
radio is protected. It will not operate if it is installed
in a different vehicle.
198
To change the default on the display, press the
RCL button until the desired option displays, then
hold the button until the display flashes. The
selected display is now the default.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The selection displays.
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for two seconds until SC displays and a beep
sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the
station that was set, returns and the
equalization that was selected, is stored for
that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET
SCAN displays and a double beep sounds. The
radio goes to a preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, then goes
to the next preset station. Press either SCAN
arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
199
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB (treble)
displays. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease
the tone. If a station is weak or has static,
decrease the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push
and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio beeps once
and adjusts the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
when no tone or speaker controls display.
CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and
classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO
EQ button until CUSTOM displays. Then manually
adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using the
AUDIO knob.
200
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, push and release the
AUDIO knob until BAL (balance) displays.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
FAD (fade) displays. Turn the knob to move
the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the
middle position, select balance or fade and push
and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio beeps
once and adjusts the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
when no tone or speaker controls display.
CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). RDS features are available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY displays.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY displays, press either
SEEK arrow to select and to go to the PTY’s
first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and
the PTY displays, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY does not display, press either
SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE button to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the
display, go back to Step 1.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases, a
radio station can broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters display instead of the
frequency. RDS stations can also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio searches
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
201
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold
the P-TYPE button until a beep sounds on the
PTY you want to interrupt with. When selected, an
asterisk displays beside that PTY on the display.
Select multiple interrupts if desired. When listening
to a CD, the last selected RDS station interrupts
play if that selected program type format is
broadcast.
s SCAN t: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY displays.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio begins
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio scans
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
202
Alternate Frequency: Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger FM station
with the same program type. To turn alternate
frequency on, press and hold AM/FM for
two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio can
switch to FM stations with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
AM/FM again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.
The radio does not switch to stronger FM stations.
Setting Preset PTYs
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up
to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
1. Press AM/FM to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY displays.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY
that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national
emergencies. When an alert announcement
comes on the current radio station, ALERT!
displays. You will hear the announcement, even if
the volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD is
playing, play stops during the announcement. Alert
announcements cannot be turned off.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported
by all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO displays. Press this button to
see the message. The message can display the
artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message displays every three seconds. To
scroll through the message, press and release the
INFO button. A new group of words display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message displays, INFO disappears from the
display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. The last message is shown until
a new message is received or you tune to a
different station.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tuned
station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the
tuned station, press this button. Brackets
are displayed around TRAF and when a traffic
announcement broadcasts on the tuned radio
station, you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and the
radio seeks to a station that does. When a station
that broadcasts traffic announcements is found,
the radio stops seeking and brackets are displayed
around TRAF. If no station is found that broadcast
traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets
or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go
to a station that supports traffic announcements.
If no station is found that broadcasts traffic
announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.
The radio plays the traffic announcements if the
volume is low. The radio interrupts the play
of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements and the brackets display.
203
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the
track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R has been handled. There can be an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,
and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these
problems occur, check the bottom surface of the
CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not play
properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
of Your CDs on page 219 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
204
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this
button to load CDs into the CD player. This CD
player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right
of the slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into
the slot, label side up. The player pulls
the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for
two seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, begins to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the light begins
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing
and turns green you can load another CD. The
CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to
load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six,
complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading
CDs, the radio begins to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a
number for each CD displays.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number appears on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the
CD AUX button, then press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD. A small
bar appears under the CD number that is
playing and the track number displays.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of
this button to eject a CD(s). To eject the CD
that is currently playing, press and release this
button. To eject multiple CDs, press and hold this
button for two seconds. A beep sounds and
the indicator light flashes while a CD is being
ejected.
REMOVE CD displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player. If
the CD is pushed back into the player, before
the 25 second time period is complete, the player
senses an error and tries to eject the CD
several times before stopping.
205
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to
eject a CD after trying to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer resets at each
press of eject, causing the player to not eject the
CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected,
remove the CD. After removing the CD, push the
PWR knob off and then on again, or wait for
the system to reset. This clears the CD-sensing
feature and enables CDs to be loaded into
the player again.
{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release this button to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track
displays.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release this button to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track
displays.
206
RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one track
or an entire CD can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press
and release the RPT button. RPT displays.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press
and hold the RPT button for two seconds.
RPT displays. Press RPT again to turn
off repeat play.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the
tracks can be listened to in random order, rather
than sequential order, on one CD or on all of
the CDs.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD in random order,
press and release the RDM button. RANDOM
ONE displays. Press RDM again to turn off
random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are
loaded in random order, press and hold RDM
for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and
RANDOM ALL displays. Press RDM again to
turn off random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting while
playing a CD. The equalization is stored
whenever a CD is played. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
RCL (Recall): Press this button to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change
the default on the display, track, and elapsed time,
press the button until the desired display is
shown, then hold the button until the display
flashes. The selected display becomes the default.
sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to the
AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remains
inside the radio for future listening.
start of the current track, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more
than once, the player continues moving backward
or forward through the CD.
sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
SCAN displays and a beep sounds. The radio
goes to the next track, plays for 10 seconds, then
goes to the next track. Press either SCAN
arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CD
SCAN displays and a beep sounds. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow
again, to stop scanning.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called
song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track
selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in
this section for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in
song list mode. S-LIST should not display. If
S-LIST displays, press the SONG LIST
button to turn it off.
207
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the
numbered pushbutton and then use the SEEK
SCAN right arrow to locate the track to be
saved. The track begins to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to
save the track into memory. When SONG
LIST is pressed, one beep sounds. After
two seconds of continuously pressing
the SONG LIST button, two beeps sound to
confirm the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other
selections.
S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more than
20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST
button. One beep sounds and S-LIST displays.
The recorded tracks begins to play in the
order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track
returns to the first saved track.
208
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list
on. S-LIST displays.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the
desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep sounds. After two seconds of
continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps sound to confirm the track has
been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining
tracks are moved up the list. When another track
is added to the song list, the track is added to
the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list
on. S-LIST displays.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
more than four seconds. One beep sounds,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and
a final beep sounds after four seconds.
S-LIST EMPTY displays indicating the song
list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains
saved tracks from that CD, those tracks are
automatically deleted from the song list. Any tracks
saved to the song list again are added to the
bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST
button. One beep sounds and S-LIST is removed
from the display.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting the
problem.
209
Using an MP3
MP3 CD-R Disc
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning
an MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is
usually better to burn the disc all at once.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and
album are available for display by the radio
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files
on one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension, other file extensions might not work.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album. Each
folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
210
The player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and
255 files. Long file names, folder names, or playlist
names can use more disc memory space than
necessary. To conserve space on the disc,
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. You can also play an MP3 CD that
was recorded using no file folders. The system
can support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep
the depth of the folders to a minimum in order
to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback. If a CD contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,
and 255 files the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum are ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All files
contained directly under the root directory
are accessed prior to any root directory folders.
However, playlists (Px) are always be accessed
before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/
subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then
play begins from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root
directory have played, play continues from
files according to their numerical listing. After
playing the last track from the last folder,
play begins again at the first track of the first
folder or root directory.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions do not function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files
are located under the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons searches playlists (Px)
first and then go to the root folder. When the radio
displays the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default
display. See RCL later in this section for more
information. The new track name displays.
211
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
the file name without the extension (such
as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 39 characters or 3 pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension
of the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists which were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING DISC
displays. The CD should begin playing and the
CD symbol displays. If you want to insert a
CD with the ignition off, first press the eject button
or the RCL button.
212
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
on page 219 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
\ 1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Press and
hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to
advance at 10 times the normal playing speed.
Press and hold it for more than two seconds
to advance at 20 times the normal playing speed.
Release this pushbutton to play the track. FWD
and the elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM 2 (Random): To repeat the tracks in the
current folder or playlist, press and release
this pushbutton. FOLDER RANDOM displays.
Once all of the tracks in the current folder
or playlist have been played, the system moves
on to the next folder or playlist and plays all of the
tracks in random order.
To repeat the tracks on the CD, press and hold
this pushbutton for two seconds. A beep sounds
and DISC RANDOM displays. This feature
does not work with playlists.
While in random, pressing and releasing either
SEEK arrow goes to the next or previous random
track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RANDOM displays.
# 3 (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the next folder or playlist. If
the disc contains playlists, it goes through
the playlist, then the folders. Pressing this button
while in folder random mode takes you to the
next folder and randomizes the tracks in that
folder. This function does not work on a CD that
does not contain folders or playlists.
213
4 s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Press and
hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to
reverse at 10 times the normal playing speed.
Press and hold it for more than two seconds
to reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed.
Release this pushbutton to play the track. REV and
the elapsed time of the track appears on the
display. If this pushbutton is pressed for more than
20 seconds, the radio stops reversing and
begins to play.
6 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton
to go to the first track in the previous folder or
playlist. If the disc contains playlists, it goes
through the playlist, then the folders. Pressing this
pushbutton while in folder random mode takes
you to the previous folder and randomizes
the tracks in that folder. This function does not
work on a CD that does not contain folders
or playlists.
214
w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Press the down arrow to go
to the start of the previous track. Pressing
either arrow for more than two seconds searches
the previous or next tracks at two tracks
per second. When the desired track number
displays, release the arrow to stop searching and
to play the track.
TUNE: Turn this knob to fast track reverse or
advance through tracks in all folders or playlists.
The track number and file name appears on
the display for each track. Turn this knob while in
random to fast track reverse or advance the
tracks in sequential order.
RCL (Recall): Push this button to switch between
track mode, folder, or playlist mode, and time of
day mode. The display shows only 13 characters,
but there can be up to three pages of text. If
there are more than 13 characters in the song,
folder, or playlist name pushing this button within
two seconds takes you to the next page of
text. If there are no other pages to be shown,
pushing this button within two seconds takes you
to the next display mode.
INFO (Information): INFO displays whenever a
current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO disappears from
the display when the information in the ID3 tag
has finished.
Track mode displays the current track number and
the ID3 tag song name.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. The CD symbol
displays when a CD is loaded.
Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder or
playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
Time of day mode displays the time of day and
the ID3 tag song name.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs can be loaded with the radio and
ignition off if this button is pressed first.
To change the default on the display, push this
button until you see the desired display, then hold
this button for two seconds. The radio produces
one beep and the selected display is now the
default.
215
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
XL on the radio display,
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
Channels)
after the channel name,
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
indicates content with
explicit language.
Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
moves into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
(after a four second delay) data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune
available
to another station. If this station was one of the presets,
choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
not available
The system is working properly.
216
Radio Display Message
Condition
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No Info
Category Name not
available
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
XM Locked
Theft lock active
Radio ID
Unknown
Chk XMRcvr
Action Required
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with the servicing facility.
Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Radio ID not known
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
(should only be if
could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.
hardware failure)
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.
217
Radio Reception
FM Stereo
Frequency interference and static during normal
radio reception can occur if items such as
cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices are
plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the item from the
accessory power outlet.
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur
when things like storms and power lines interfere
with radio reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on your radio.
218
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can cause
loss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.
The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate
interference.
Care of Your CDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD will not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players
because the lens of the CD optics can become
contaminated by lubricants.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the
roof of the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
A vehicle with a sunroof might not get the
best performance from the XM™ system if the
sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.
219
✍ NOTES
220
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle ............................................ 222
Defensive Driving ...................................... 222
Drunken Driving ........................................ 223
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 226
Braking ...................................................... 226
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 227
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 229
Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 230
StabiliTrak® System ................................... 231
Panic Brake Assist .................................... 231
Steering .................................................... 232
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 234
Passing ..................................................... 235
Loss of Control .......................................... 237
Driving at Night ......................................... 238
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 239
City Driving ............................................... 242
Freeway Driving ........................................ 243
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 244
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 245
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 246
Winter Driving ........................................... 248
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .......................................... 252
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 253
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 253
Towing ........................................................ 259
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 259
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 259
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 261
221
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 18.
222
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end
collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes
proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with
resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help
do these things, or pull off the road in a
safe place to do them. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one
contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink alcohol,
so they never drive after drinking. For persons
under 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state to
drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
223
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three double
martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of body
water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body
water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same
body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
224
But the ability to drive is affected well below a
BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that
the driving skills of many people are impaired at a
BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the
effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired
at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics
show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is
12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the
chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up. “I will
be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be
able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in
a cab; or if you are with a group, designate
a driver who will not drink.
225
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 272.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 166.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
226
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of
a second. But that is only an average. It might be
less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not have
time to cool between hard stops. The brakes
will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and
allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 272.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking
system that will help prevent a braking skid.
United States
Canada
If your vehicle has ABS, this warning light on the
instrument panel will come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to
drive away, ABS will check itself. You may hear a
momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is
going on, and you may even notice that your brake
pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, the anti-lock brake
system warning light will stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light on page 167.
227
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
228
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
If your vehicle has the vehicle stability control
system, it includes a brake assist system which
provides more powerful braking during a sudden,
hard brake application. See “Vehicle Stability
Control System” under Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 230.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not
have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.
You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation
or notice some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a
situation that requires hard braking.
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you do not have ABS, your
first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your
wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
cannot respond to your steering. Momentum will
carry it in whatever direction it was headed when
the wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the
road, into the very thing you were trying to avoid, or
into traffic.
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily
increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to
squeeze the brakes hard without locking the
wheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, ease
off the brake pedal. This will help you retain
steering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.
See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 227.
In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
229
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system works the front brakes and
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this
is normal. Leave the system on during ordinary
driving so that it can operate when needed. When
the ignition is turned to ON, the system
automatically turns on.
This light should come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
If it stays on or comes on while you are driving,
there is a problem with your traction control
system.
230
The TRAC OFF button
is located to the left of
the steering wheel
below the instrument
panel cluster.
When getting the vehicle out of mud or newly
fallen snow, turn off the traction control system.
The system that controls engine performance
interferes with the process of freeing the
front wheels. To turn off traction control, press the
TRAC OFF button. The traction control system
warning light will come on. The vehicle stability
control system (StabiliTrak®) is always activated,
even when the traction control system is turned
off. To turn the traction control system back
on, press the TRAC OFF button again. The
traction control system warning light will go off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light
on page 168 for more information.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 272 for more information.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may have this feature. The
StabiliTrak® system helps provide integrated
control of the systems such as anti-lock brake
system, traction control and engine control.
This system automatically controls the brakes and
engine to help prevent the vehicle from skidding
when cornering on a slippery road surface or
turning the steering wheel abruptly.
This system will activate when your vehicle speed
reaches or exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h), and will
deactivate when the vehicle speed reduces
to below 9 mph (15 km/h).
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment
for a few seconds when the engine is started or
just after the vehicle begins to move. This
means that the system is in the self-check mode,
but does not indicate a malfunction.
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the
traction control system warning light will blink and
an alarm will sound intermittently. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
This light warns that
there is a problem
somewhere in
the traction control
system or StabiliTrak®.
Panic Brake Assist
Your vehicle has a panic brake assist system that
monitors the intention of the driver while braking.
If the system senses that the driver has applied
hard/fast pressure to the brake pedal, the system
will generate additional pressure, making it
easier for the driver to maintain brake application.
When this happens the brake pedal will feel
easier to push. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let the system work for you. You
may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice
some noise but this is normal. The brakes
will return to normal operation after the brake
pedal has been released.
The brake assist system becomes operational
after the vehicle has accelerated to a speed
in excess of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It
stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a
speed below approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
231
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning,
you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable
speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
mentioned on the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
232
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of your tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both
control systems — steering and braking — have
to do their work where the tires meet the road.
Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,
adding the hard braking can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering
through a sharp curve and you suddenly
accelerate. Those two control systems — steering
and acceleration — can overwhelm those
places where the tires meet the road and make
you lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the
vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 272.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come over
a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car
suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts
out from between parked cars and stops right in
front of you. You can avoid these problems by
braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes
you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for
evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes — but, unless
you have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock
your wheels.
See Braking on page 226. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
233
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder
while you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
234
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below
the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle
straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn
the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until
the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a
brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly
put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on
collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
235
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right
lane and do not get too close. Time your move
so you will be increasing speed as the time
comes to move into the other lane. If the way
is clear to pass, you will have a running
start that more than makes up for the distance
you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel
your pass, you need only slow down and drop
back again and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
shoulder, and start your left lane change
signal before moving out of the right lane to
pass. When you are far enough ahead of
the passed vehicle to see its front in
your vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the right
lane change signal and move back into
the right lane. Remember that your vehicle’s
passenger side outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a
time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before
passing the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are
not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
236
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
237
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If
you do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,
where the wheels are no longer rolling, release
enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels
rolling again. This restores steering control.
Push the brake pedal down steadily when you
have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are
rolling, you will have steering control.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need
to slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles.
238
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a
lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as
well because your tire-to-road traction is not as
good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have
much tread left, you will get even less traction. It is
always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may
get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for
driving on dry pavement.
239
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your
brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try
to slow down before you hit them.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment
in good shape and keep your windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs
of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal
lightly until the brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
{CAUTION:
240
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can
come in through the engine’s air intake
and badly damage the engine. Never drive
through water that is slightly lower than the
underbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid
deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
CAUTION:
(Continued)
As little as six inches of flowing water can
carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very
cautious about trying to drive through
flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
{CAUTION:
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried away.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
Tires on page 322.
241
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
242
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 243.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
Freeway Driving
driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a
smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway
as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try
to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing
speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often
as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want
to pass.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving
is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive
at the same speed most of the other drivers are
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
243
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
Of course, you will find experienced and able
service experts in GM dealerships all across North
America. They will be ready and willing to help
if you need it.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce
your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think
you are going slower than you actually are.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If
you must start when you are not fresh — such
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out.
244
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of
the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and
the rush of the wind against the vehicle that
can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!
If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in
less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors
and your instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
245
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine assist
the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
246
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help
cool your engine and transaxle, and you can
climb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
247
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,
and will need to be very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 322.
248
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile
traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels
will spin and polish the surface under the tires
even more.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
may offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too. If
you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) on page 227. This system improves
your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Whether you have ABS or
not, you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. Without ABS, if
you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down
steadily to get the most traction you can.
249
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just
slide. Brake so your wheels always keep rolling
and you can still steer.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
may appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you
are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
250
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the
exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
251
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when you
are stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or
others could be injured. And, the
transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting
the transaxle back and forth, you can destroy
the transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out on page 253.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 341.
252
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.
That will clear the area around the front wheels.
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)
and a forward gear, or with a manual transaxle,
between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and
REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little as
possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you
shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that may free your
vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out
after a few tries, it may need to be towed out. Or,
you can use the recovery hook. If your vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 259.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may properly carry, the
Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
253
Tire and Loading Information Label
This weight includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C), and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires
on page 322 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 329.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open you will find
the label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
254
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 261 for important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
255
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
256
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
Certification Label
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out. See “Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
the center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. It tells
you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
257
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly. If you have fold-down rear
seats, you will find four anchors on
the back wall of your trunk. You can
use these anchors to tie down lighter
loads. They are not strong enough for
heavy things, however, so put them as
far forward as you can in the trunk or
rear area.
CAUTION:
258
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 406.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on
a Long Trip on page 244.
259
Dinghy Towing
If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, it
cannot be dinghy towed. See “Dolly Towing” for
more information regarding towing your vehicle.
If your vehicle has a manual transaxle, it can
be dinghy towed.
When dinghy towing, be sure to follow the posted
legal speed limit.
1. Put the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
260
2. Turn the ignition to ACC to avoid locking the
steering wheel. Make sure the audio system
is turned off and that nothing is plugged
into the power outlets.
3. Release the parking brake.
After dinghy towing, let the engine idle for more
than three minutes before driving the vehicle.
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your
vehicle could be badly damaged and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Dolly Towing
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
To tow your vehicle using a dolly, follow
these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for an automatic
transaxle and in NEUTRAL for a manual
transaxle.
3. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
4. Release the parking brake.
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you
have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with
the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify
the vehicle trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the
Trailer” that appears later in this section.
261
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced
to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate
at relatively higher speeds and under greater
loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
262
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you’ll be driving. A
good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicle is
driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.
This helps your engine and other parts of
your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a
trailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximum
posted speed for trailers, or no more than
55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your
vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
• the weight of the trailer
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Weight of the Trailer
You can ask your dealer for our trailering
information or advice, or you can write us at our
Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer
Assistance Offices on page 404 for more
information.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs
(680 kg). But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on
your vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if
you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 253 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
263
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253. Then be
sure you do not go over the GVW limit for
your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
Hitches
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they are not, you may be
able to get them right simply by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers
on the Tire and Loading Information label
located on the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
264
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right
hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
• Don’t let the steel in a hitch contact the
aluminum on your bumper. If you do, the
two will corrode. You can use something like
paint or plastic tape to separate the steel
and aluminum. The same steel to aluminum
problem can happen with fasteners too.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body
of your vehicle when you install a trailer
hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes
later when you remove the hitch. If you
don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.
See Engine Exhaust on page 119. Dirt
and water can too.
Safety Chains
Driving with a Trailer
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes
separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety
chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the
bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you
can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes?
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the
trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly. And, if you have
anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into your
vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both systems
won’t work well, or at all.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch, platform
and attachments, safety chains, electrical
connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If
the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake
controller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electrical
connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
265
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer
won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,
trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a
good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can
return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just
move that hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
266
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.
Check with your dealer. The arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a
turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re
about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs
on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when
they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
don’t shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce
your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transaxle
overheating.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle,
with a trailer attached, on a hill. If
something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and
both your vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or into
gear for a manual transaxle, yet. When
parking uphill, turn your wheels away from the
curb. When parking downhill, turn your
wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an
automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for
a manual transaxle.
5. Release the regular brakes.
267
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• start your engine
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance
Schedule for more on this. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are
automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil,
drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review this information
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat
during severe operating conditions. See Engine
Overheating on page 297.
268
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 272
Accessories and Modifications ................... 272
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 273
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 273
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .......................................... 274
Fuel ............................................................. 274
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 274
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 274
California Fuel ........................................... 275
Additives ................................................... 275
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 276
Filling the Tank ......................................... 277
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 279
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 280
Hood Release ........................................... 280
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 282
Engine Oil ................................................. 284
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 288
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 290
Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 292
Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 293
Engine Coolant .......................................... 294
Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 297
Engine Overheating ................................... 297
Cooling System ......................................... 299
Power Steering Fluid ................................. 304
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 305
Brakes ...................................................... 306
Battery ...................................................... 309
Jump Starting ............................................ 310
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 315
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 315
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps ....................................... 316
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) ................................ 317
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ...... 318
Back-Up Lamps ......................................... 320
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 320
269
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 321
Tires ............................................................ 322
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 323
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 326
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 329
Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 330
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 333
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 335
Buying New Tires ...................................... 336
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 337
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 338
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 339
Wheel Replacement .................................. 340
Tire Chains ............................................... 341
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 342
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 343
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 344
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ............................................. 346
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 351
Compact Spare Tire .................................. 354
270
Appearance Care ........................................ 354
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 354
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 356
Leather ...................................................... 356
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 357
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 357
Weatherstrips ............................................ 358
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 358
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 358
Finish Care ............................................... 358
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ......................................... 359
Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 359
Tires ......................................................... 360
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 360
Finish Damage .......................................... 361
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 361
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 361
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 362
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Vehicle Identification .................................. 363
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 363
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 363
Electrical System ........................................ 364
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 364
Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 364
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 364
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................. 364
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 365
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 365
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 367
Capacities and Specifications .................... 369
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 370
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 371
271
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and
stability control. Some of these accessories may
even cause malfunction or damage not covered by
warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to
your GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,
you will know that GM-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine GM Accessories.
272
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and
metric fasteners can be easily
confused. If you use the wrong
fasteners, parts can later break or fall
off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you will want to use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 417.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 80.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Part E: Maintenance
Record on page 396.
273
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum
vehicle performance, GM recommends the use
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
274
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, you may notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine
needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 275 for additional information.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is
not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 170. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type
of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer has additives that will help correct
and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be
available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
275
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of
such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for service.
276
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel might
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or
any other fuel not recommended in the previous
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of
improper fuel would not be covered by your
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the
law in some places. Do not re-enter
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children
away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
277
The fuel door release
lever is located near
the floor under the
driver’s seat on the
outboard side.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. On some vehicles you may
have to push in while turning the cap.
While refueling, hang the fuel cap inside of the
fuel door.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel
can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank, and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon
as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 358.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
278
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 170.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage
your fuel tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 170.
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping gasoline.
279
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
280
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the release
handle with this
symbol on it.
It is located below
the instrument panel
to the left of the
steering wheel.
4. Release the hood prop rod from its retainer
and put it into the slot in the hood. To insert
the hood prop rod into the slot, move it straight
up. If it is moved to the side or toward the
inside of the vehicle, it may become detached.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Make sure to return the hood
prop rod carefully back to its retainer to avoid
damaging the vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up
on the secondary hood release. The lever is
located near the middle of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
281
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood, here is what you will see:
282
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 305.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 304.
C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure
Cap on page 297.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 284.
E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System
on page 299.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 284.
G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (If
Equipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level”
under Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 290.
H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir and
Hydraulic Clutch (If Equipped). See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 306 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 293.
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 288.
J. Battery. See Battery on page 309.
K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 367.
283
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
If the engine oil
pressure light appears
on the instrument
cluster, check the
engine oil level
right away.
For more information, see Oil Pressure Light on
page 173. You should check the engine oil
level regularly; this is an added reminder.
284
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the indent at the tip of the
dipstick, you need to add at least one quart/liter of
oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 369.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the upper hole, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282
for the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range. Push
the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
285
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
286
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements
for your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommend that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide
easier cold starting and better protection for
the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you need for good
performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
Change the oil and filter every 5,000 miles
(8 000 km) or 3 months, whichever occurs first.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 377.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may
be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very
long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly
dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine
oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use
and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by
putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used
oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of
used oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or a
local recycling center for help.
287
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the air cleaner/filter at each engine oil change.
Replace the filter every 30,000 miles (48 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 376 for more information.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282
for more information on location.
288
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
1. Release the two clips that hold the cover down.
2. Lift the cover off.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
4. Reinstall the cover.
289
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transaxle
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Check the fluid in the transaxle and differential
at the intervals listed in Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 376, and
be sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 394.
How to Check Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
290
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too
little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
the transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F
(32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 158°F to
176°F (70°C to 80°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing
for about three seconds in each range.
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The automatic transaxle dipstick has an orange
handle and is located near the front of the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 282 for more information on location.
1. Release the tab and pull out the dipstick and
wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds
and then pull it back out again.
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to
five minutes.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be between
the two dimples in the hot range.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way; then
press the tab down to lock the dipstick in place.
291
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to
determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use.
See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 394.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the
proper fluid to bring the level into the area between
dimples on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at
the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and
the damages may not be covered by your
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle
fluid listed in Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 394.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
292
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then press the
tab down to lock the dipstick in place.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have your manual transaxle fluid
level checked is when the engine oil is changed.
However, the fluid in your manual transaxle
does not require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your Pontiac
dealership service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too
little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
the transaxle fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off,
the vehicle is parked on a level place and the
transaxle is cool enough for you to rest your
fingers on the transaxle case.
Then, follow these steps:
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be
sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low,
add more fluid as described in the next steps.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid.
It is not necessary to regularly check the fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system.
Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
The hydraulic clutch and brake master cylinder
use the same reservoir.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
How to Add Fluid
Here is how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use.
See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 394.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only
enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully
seated.
293
When to Check and What to Use
The reservoir is located
at the back of the
engine compartment, on
the driver’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 282 for
more information on
location.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often you should check the fluid level in
your master cylinder reservoir and for the proper
fluid. See Part B: Owner Checks and Services
on page 386 and Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 394.
294
How to Check and Add Fluid
Check to make sure that the fluid level is at or
above the MIN mark. If the level is below the MIN
mark, see the instructions on the reservoir cap.
Engine Coolant
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a coolant
developed to last for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first. When
coolant is added or changed, use DEX-COOL®
coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 297.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F
(− 37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® may cause premature engine,
heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant may require changing
sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in your vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
295
If you have to add coolant more than four times
a year, have your dealer check your cooling
system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 394 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at LOW,
or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
level should be up to FULL, or a little higher.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282
for the location of the coolant recovery tank.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant
recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
296
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. With the coolant
recovery tank, you will almost never have
to add coolant at the radiator. Never turn
the radiator pressure cap — even a
little — when the engine and radiator
are hot.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the
radiator. For information on how to add coolant to
the radiator, see Cooling System on page 299.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282
for more information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 169.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Just
turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
297
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to do
so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
298
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues and you have not
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle
right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the
engine for three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
The coolant level should be at or above the
FULL mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
299
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If
you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fan
is running. If the engine is overheating, the
fan should be running. If it is not, your vehicle
needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty.
300
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the
coolant level is not at or above the FULL mark,
add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant recovery
tank. See Engine Coolant on page 294 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the radiator pressure cap — even
a little — they can come out at high
speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and radiator pressure cap to cool
if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is
at the FULL mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one
more thing you can try. You can add the proper
coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure
the cooling system is cool before you do it.
301
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap
when the cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it first stops. Do not
press down while turning the pressure cap.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now
push down as you turn it. Remove the
pressure cap.
302
3. Fill the radiator with the proper coolant
mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
See Engine Coolant on page 294 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper coolant
mixture through the filler neck until the level
reaches the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time
during this procedure if coolant begins to flow
out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure
cap. Be sure the ears on the pressure cap are
in line with the vent tube.
303
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 282
for reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
You can check your fluid without taking the cap off.
Just look at the reservoir.
• When the engine compartment is hot, the
level should be between the HOT marks.
• When the engine compartment is cool, the
level should be between the COLD marks.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 394.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in
the system or you hear an unusual noise. A
fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
304
Notice: When adding power steering fluid or
making a complete fluid change, always
use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
If your vehicle has the low windshield washer fluid
level warning light, it will come on when the
fluid level is too low. See Low Washer Fluid
Warning Light on page 175.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 282
for reservoir location.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it
is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.
305
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The hydraulic clutch and
brake master cylinder
use the same reservoir.
It is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine
Compartment
Overview on page 282
for the location of
the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system or the hydraulic clutch system.
If it is, have that system fixed immediately, since a
leak means that the brakes will not work well, or
will not work at all.
306
So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If
you add fluid when the linings are worn, then you
will have too much fluid when you get new
brake linings. You should add or remove brake
fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn
if the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake and/or clutch
hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 166.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 394.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 358.
307
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum
brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly applied. This does not mean something
is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque
specifications.
Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators,
but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Also, the rear brake drums should be
removed and inspected each time the tires are
removed for rotation or changing. When you have
the front brake pads replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 393.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
308
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop,
the disc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely
make a moderate or heavier stop, the brakes
might not adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,
then — very carefully — make a few moderate
brake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),
so the brakes will adjust properly.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested
with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace
parts of the braking system — for example,
when the brake linings wear down and you need
new ones put in — be sure you get new
approved GM replacement parts. If you do not, the
brakes might not work properly. For example, if
someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between the front and
rear brakes can change — for the worse. The
braking performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in
the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 282 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
309
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep the
battery from running down.
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 310 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
310
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or
a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter. Turn off the radio and
all lamps that are not needed. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
311
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal
locations on each vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 282 for more
information on location.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle. But
if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
312
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or
you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
313
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative terminal of the good battery. Use
a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to
a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a
remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable
at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
314
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 320.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
315
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
and Parking Lamps
A. Headlamp
B. Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
316
To replace the headlamp, turn signal, or parking
lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Open the hood and locate the lamp assembly.
2. Remove the rubber cover and socket from
the headlamp or turn signal/parking lamp.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace the center high-mounted stoplamp
bulb, do the following:
1. Locate the bulb which is on the inside of the
liftgate/liftglass near the top.
2. Remove the two clips on both sides of the
cover and remove it.
3. Release the retainer clip holding the bulb on
the headlamp by pressing down and moving
the metal retainer away from you.
Turn the turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove.
4. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
5. Reverse the steps to install a new bulb.
3. Remove the two screws from the CHMSL
housing. Then remove the housing to
expose the bulb.
317
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull it out of the lamp housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the previous steps to install a
new bulb.
318
To replace the turn signal and/or stop/taillamp
bulbs, do the following:
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise
and pull it out of the
lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Reverse the previous steps to install a
new bulb.
1. Remove the storage compartment cover in
the rear cargo area of the vehicle to access
the bulbs.
5. Reinstall the cover.
319
Back-Up Lamps
Replacement Bulbs
The back-up lamp
bulb is located in
the bumper.
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamp
CHMSL
Front Turn Signal
and Parking Lamp
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Rear Turn Signal
Stoplamp/Taillamp
Bulb Number
7440
921
1157NA
9003
7440
7443
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
To replace the back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Reach up under the rear fascia to locate
the back-up lamp housing.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull it out of the lamp housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Reverse the previous steps to install a
new bulb.
320
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at
least twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper
Blade Check” under At Least Twice a Year on
page 387 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. Here’s how to
remove the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper
assembly toward the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
321
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to
the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
CAUTION:
322
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 329.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger car tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger Car Tire Example
323
(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction and temperature resistance. For more
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 338.
(F) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that
load. For information on recommended tire
pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 329
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
See Compact Spare Tire on page 354 and If a
Tire Goes Flat on page 342.
324
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that
load. See Compact Spare Tire on page 354 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 329.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger car tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U. S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 70% as high as it is wide.
325
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and the speed rating
of a tire. The load range represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples
of optional accessories are, automatic
transmission/transaxle, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
326
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 329.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 253.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
327
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 329 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 253.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 335.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 338.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 253.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 253.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
328
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label
shows your vehicle’s original equipment tires and
the correct inflation pressures for your tires
when they are cold. The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to
support your vehicle’s maximum load carrying
capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 253. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Spare Tire on page 354.
329
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). This feature is designed to alert you
when the system detects a large change in the
pressure of one tire. The system cannot alert you
before you drive that a tire is low or flat. You
must begin driving before the system works
properly. The TPMS works with the brake control
system and is designed to detect differences
in the tire rotation speeds that are caused
by changes in tire pressure. The TPMS does not
replace normal tire maintenance, see Tires on
page 322, Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 and When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 335.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
330
This light, on the
instrument panel cluster,
comes on when the
tire pressure monitoring
system detects a
low-tire condition.
This light also comes on for a few seconds and
then go off when you turn the ignition to ON. This
indicates that the TPMS is functioning properly.
If the low-tire pressure warning light comes
on while driving your vehicle, the system may
have detected a low-tire condition. You need to
stop as soon as possible and check your tires
for damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 342 and Changing a Flat Tire on
page 343. Also check the tire pressure in all four
tires, and set them to the specified level shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 329 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 253 for additional
information.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system on your
vehicle warns you when one of the tires is
significantly under-inflated and when some
combinations of the tires are significantly
under-inflated. However, there are other
combinations of significantly under-inflated tires for
which the tire pressure monitoring system might not
give a warning. These other combinations are
relatively common, accounting for approximately
half the instances in which vehicles have
significantly under-inflated tires. For example, the
system might not warn you when both tires on the
same side or on the same axle of your vehicle are
significantly under-inflated. It is particularly
important, therefore, to check the tire pressure in all
of the tires regularly and maintain proper pressure.
In order for the tire pressure monitoring system to
work properly you need to reset (initialize) the
tire pressure monitoring system. Any time
you check and/or adjust a tire’s pressure, repair or
replace a tire or wheel, or rotate the tires the
tire pressure monitor system needs to be reset.
331
Do not reset (initialize) the system without first
correcting the cause of the low-tire condition. If the
system is reset when the tire pressures are
incorrect, the system will not function properly and
might not alert you when a tire is low.
To reset (initialize) the system:
1. Park the vehicle at a safe place and apply the
parking brake. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
3. If the low-tire
pressure warning
light is on, push
the SET (reset)
button for a
few seconds.
The reset button is on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel. The low-tire
warning light should go off.
332
4. Press and hold the SET (reset) button until
the low-tire warning light comes on and
flashes on/off three times. The tire pressure
warning reset button starts the reset
(initialization) process.
If the low-tire pressure warning light does not
flash while you hold the reset button, the
system might be malfunctioning and needs
service. See your GM dealer for service.
The system completes the reset (initialization)
process after driving at vehicle speeds of at least
19 mph (30 km/h) to 62 mph (100 km/h) for
more than one hour. Do not push the SET (reset)
button while driving. If you do the initialization
process is cancelled. The initialization process can
take up to approximately one hour of driving
under the following conditions:
• The vehicle speed is between 31 mph
(50 km/h) and 62 mph (100 km/h).
• The roads are dry, smooth, and straight.
• The number of passengers is one or
two (including the driver).
The low-tire pressure warning light may not come
on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it
could come on when the tire inflation pressure is
set correctly under the following circumstances:
• A compact spare tire, snow tires, or tire chains
are installed on your vehicle.
• The tires are over-inflated, or the tire inflation
pressure suddenly drops due to a tire bursting
or other causes.
• The vehicle is driven on a slippery road
surface such as rough or frozen roads.
• The vehicle speed is less than
19 mph (30 km/h), and the driving duration is
less than five minutes.
• The tires are made by a different manufacturer
or differ in tread pattern than the original
equipment tires.
• Rapid acceleration/deceleration or multiple
consecutive sharp turns.
• Towing a trailer.
• The vehicle is loaded over the limit or not
balanced properly.
• The initialization (reset) procedure was not
performed correctly after replacing or
rotating tires or wheels.
• The outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C)
or above 104°F (40°C).
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 335
and Wheel Replacement on page 340 for
more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
The first rotation is the most important. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 376 for scheduled rotation intervals.
333
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 369.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Tires should only be moved from front to rear and
rear to front on the same side of the vehicle.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures to the amounts
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
334
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 343.
Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system will need to reset (initialize) the system
after each tire rotation. See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 330.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
335
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires that
are the same size, brand, load range, speed rating,
and construction type (radial and bias-belted
tires) as your vehicle’s original tires. This way, your
vehicle will continue to have tires that are
designed to give the same performance and
vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original
tires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 323
for additional information.
(Continued)
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
Compact Spare Tire on page 354.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
CAUTION:
336
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 336 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 272 for
additional information.
337
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum selection width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (11⁄2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the Unites States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements.
338
Traction — AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature — A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your tires and wheels may need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
339
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
replace it (except some aluminum wheels,
which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset
and be mounted the same way as the one
it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new GM original equipment parts. This way, you
will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 343 for more
information.
340
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven. It
could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use only SAE Class
“S” type chains that are the proper size for
your tires. Install them on the front tires
and tighten them as tightly as possible with
the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly
and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains
contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your
vehicle.
341
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane
position, and then gently brake to a stop well out
of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
342
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use
the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever
in PARK (P), or shift a manual
transaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, you should put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire farthest away
from the one being changed. That would
be the tire on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
The following information will tell you how to use
the jack and change a tire.
343
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jack, wheel wrench, jack handle and spare
tire are stowed in the rear of the vehicle,
underneath the floor of the cargo area. To remove
the spare tire and tools do the following:
1. Turn the two lock
knobs on the floor of
the cargo area to
UNLOCK.
2. Lift up the cargo area floor panel, remove the
hook attached to the bottom side of the panel
and hook it over the weatherstripping.
Notice: If you do not put the hook in the proper
location, you could damage your vehicle.
Always put the hook in the proper location in
order to avoid damaging the vehicle.
3. Remove the jack from the tray on the right
side of the compartment and the jack handle
and wheel wrench from the top side of the
compartment.
344
4. Remove the center retaining nut and lift up
the plastic tray to expose the compact
spare tire.
5. Remove the center bolt from the compact
spare tire and pull out the compact spare
tire. See Compact Spare Tire on page 354
The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
jack handle (B) and wheel wrench (C).
345
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Attach the jack handle to the jack.
2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the lift
head a little.
4. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head to
fit over the car flange between the two
notches.
3. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel
nuts. Do not remove them yet.
346
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for
the compact spare tire to fit underneath the
wheel well.
347
{CAUTION:
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the
flat tire.
7. Install the spare tire.
348
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time. The
wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
8. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces and spare
wheel.
9. Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
349
10. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 369
for wheel nut torque specification.
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
350
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 369 for
the wheel nut torque specification.
12. Tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence
as shown.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
The compact spare tire storage area is designed
only for the compact spare tire, the standard
tire cannot be stored there.
To store the flat tire, do the following:
1. Remove the center wheel cap before storing
the flat tire, if your vehicle has aluminum
wheels.
2. Place the flat tire on the rear cargo area floor
panel with the outer side of the wheel
facing up.
351
3. Use the tire tie-down straps located under the
floor panel to secure the flat tire.
5. Pass the straps through the center hole of
the wheel.
4. Hook the straps (end closest to the buckle) to
the rear, upper tie-down hooks.
352
6. Attach the other end of the straps to the rear,
lower tie-down hooks.
7. Position the tire edge against the rear center
end of the floor panel. Pull the end of the
straps to make sure the tire is secure.
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing
the compact spare tire once you are done using it.
A. Jack
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Bolt
D. Spare Tire
E. Jack Handle
F. Nut
Return the jack (A), jack handle (E), wheel
wrench (B) and compact spare tire to the storage
area. When storing the compact spare tire, put it in
place with the inner side of the wheel facing up.
353
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air
after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make
sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform well at speeds
up to 50 mph (80 km/h), so you can finish your
trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want. Of course, it is best to replace
your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
Your spare will last longer and be in good shape
in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.
Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.
354
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire
chains on your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by
opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer to
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
355
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
356
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
357
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required.
Washing Your Vehicle
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an
all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches
and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 358.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Finish Care
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to
rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap
residue completely. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 362. Do not
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain.
358
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue
from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 362.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s
finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. To help keep the
paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a
garage or covered whenever possible.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshield
is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean
the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked
in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then
rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Aluminum Wheels
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters
when running, wax, sap or other material may
be on the blade or windshield.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
359
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Tires
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
360
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Sheet Metal Damage
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from
the underbody with plain water. Clean any
areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame should
be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer or
an underbody car washing system can do this
for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
361
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
362
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code helps you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle
Certification and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
363
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 80.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit
breaker. An electrical overload will cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to
remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp
wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop
until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by
some electrical problem, and not snow or ice,
be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and
other power accessories. When the current load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed
or goes away.
364
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This
greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
The fuse block is located underneath the
instrument panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the correct size.
If you ever have a problem on the road and
don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow one.
Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you
can get along without – like the radio or air
conditioner – and use its fuse, if it is of the value
you need. Replace it as soon as you can.
Before replacing a fuse, turn every electrical
switch off.
Fuses
TAIL
OBD
Usage
Front Parking Lamps, Taillamps,
License Plate Lamps, Instrument
Panel Lights, Engine Control System
On-Board Diagnostic System
365
Fuses
Empty
P/W
WIPER
AM2
STOP
DOOR
AM1
Empty
ECU-IG
RR WIPER
A/C
366
Usage
Not Used
Power Windows
Windshield Wipers
Charging System, Air Bag System,
Starter System, Engine Control
Stop Lamps, CHMSL, Engine
Control System, Anti-lock Brakes,
Cruise Control
Power Door Locks, Liftglass Lock
Cigarette Lighter, Gauge, ECU-IG,
Wiper, Rear Wiper, Washer Fuses
Not Used
Cruise Control, Anti-lock Brakes,
Theft Deterrent System, Automatic
Transaxle Control System, Electric
Cooling Fan
Rear Window Wiper, Rear
Window Defogger
Air Conditioning
Fuses
INV
P/POINT
ECU-B
CIG
GAUGE
WASHER
M-HTR/DEF
1–UP
HTR
DEF
POWER
Usage
Power Outlets
Power Outlets
Daytime Running Lamps
Cigarette Lighter, Power Rearview
Mirrors, Power Outlets, Audio
System, Automatic Transaxle
Control System
Gauges and Meters, Back-Up
Lamps, Charging System, Power
Door Locks, Power Windows,
Sunroof, Air Conditioning,
Cruise Control
Windshield Washers
Engine Control System
Air Conditioning System
Rear Window Defogger,
M-HTR/DEF 1–UP Fuse
Power Windows, Electric Moon Roof
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
This engine compartment fuse block is located in
the engine compartment on the driver’s side of
the vehicle near the air cleaner. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 282 for more
information on location.
Fuses
ABS NO. 2
RDI FAN
ABS NO. 1
FOG
EFI2
EFI3
HEAD MAIN
ALT-S
EFI
HAZARD
Fuses
Empty
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
ETCS
Usage
Not Used
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Electronic Throttle Control System
HORN
DOME
MAIN
AMP
Usage
Anti-lock Brake System
(Without Stability Control System)
Electric Cooling Fan
Anti-lock Brake System
(With Stability Control System)
Front Fog Lamps
Multiport Fuel Injection System/
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection
System, Emission Control System
Multiport Fuel Injection System/
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection
System, Emission Control System
Right Headlamp, Left Headlamp
Fuses
Charging System
Electronic Fuel Injection System
Turn Signal Lamps, Emergency
Flasher
Horn
Interior Lights, Gauges and Meters,
Audio System, Remote Keyless
Entry System, Navigation System
(If Equipped)
Starter System, AM2 Fuse
Audio System
367
Fuses
MAYDAY
ALT
HEAD RH
HEAD LH
368
Usage
OnStar® System
ABS NO.1, ABS NO.2, RDI FAN,
FOG, Heater, AM1, POWER,
DOOR, ECU-B, TAIL, STOP,
P/POINT, INV, OBD Fuses,
Charging System
Right-hand Headlamp, Headlamp
High Beam Indicator Lamp
Left-hand Headlamp
Relays
M/G
HEAD
DIMMER
HORN
FAN NO. 2
FAN NO. 1
EFI
FOG
Usage
M/G
Headlamps
Headlamp Dimmer
Horn
Cooling Fan System
Cooling Fan System
Electronic Fuel Injection System
Fog Lamps
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
6.9 qt
6.5 L
4.4 qt
4.2 L
13.2 gal
50.0 L
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transaxle Fluid
Automatic Transaxle
3.2 qt
3.0 L
Manual Transaxle
2.0 qt
1.9 L
Wheel Nut Torque
76 lb ft
103 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 394.
Engine Specifications
Engine
1.8L L4
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
8
Automatic and Manual
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)
369
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM
dealer.
Part
GM Part Numbers
Other Part Numbers
Battery
19001602
35–6YR
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
88969107
A2036C
Engine Oil Filter
88971573
PF1233
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
88970273
CF134
PCV Valve
88974190
—
Spark Plugs*
94859446
SK16R11†, IFR5A11††
*Your engine is fitted with iridium-tipped spark plugs. Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs for better engine
performance.
† DENSO
†† NGK
370
Engine Drive Belt Routing
371
✍ NOTES
372
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 374
Introduction ............................................... 374
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 374
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 374
How This Section is Organized ................. 374
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services ................................................. 376
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 376
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 377
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ......... 386
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 386
At Least Once a Month ............................. 386
At Least Twice a Year .............................. 387
At Least Once a Year ............................... 388
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections ............................................. 392
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ............... 392
Exhaust System Inspection ........................ 392
Fuel System Inspection ............................. 392
Engine Cooling System Inspection ............. 393
Throttle System Inspection ........................ 393
Brake System Inspection ........................... 393
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants .............................................. 394
Part E: Maintenance Record ...................... 396
373
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
How This Section is Organized
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed
in this manual are necessary to keep your
vehicle in good working condition. Any damage
caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance
may not be covered by warranty.
374
This maintenance schedule is divided into
five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”
explains what to have done and how often. Some
of these services can be complex, so unless
you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should let your
GM dealer’s service department do these jobs.
Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported
service people that will perform the work using
genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If
you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 273.
If you want to purchase service information, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 417.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also
explains what you can easily do to help keep your
vehicle in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s
service department can perform for you.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some recommended products necessary to
help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These
products, or their equivalents, should be used
whether you do the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for
you to record and keep track of the maintenance
performed on your vehicle. Keep your
maintenance receipts. They may be needed to
qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
375
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services
which are to be performed at the mileage intervals
specified.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive short
distances only a few times a week. Or you
may drive long distances all the time in very hot,
dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to
do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs may vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements.
So please read the following and note how
you drive. If you have questions on how to keep
your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.
376
This part tells you the maintenance services you
should have done and when to schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service
needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service people will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed
in Part D. Make sure whoever services your
vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or
anyone else drives the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these on
the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 274.
Scheduled Maintenance
5,000 Miles (8 000 km)
The services shown in this schedule up to
120,000 miles (192 000 km) should be repeated
after 120,000 miles (192 000 km) at the same
intervals for the life of this vehicle.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on
page 386, Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections on page 392, and Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 394.
Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or
the California Air Resources Board has determined
that the failure to perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emissions warranty or limit recall
liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. We, however, urge that all
recommended maintenance services be performed
at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
10,000 Miles (16 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on
page 393.
377
15,000 Miles (24 000 km)
25,000 Miles (40 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
20,000 Miles (32 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 288 for more
information.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
378
30,000 Miles (48 000 km)
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every
30,000 miles (48 000 km) only if your vehicle
is used to tow a trailer.
35,000 Miles (56 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
40,000 Miles (64 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
45,000 Miles (72 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.
379
50,000 Miles (80 000 km)
60,000 Miles (96 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 288 for more
information.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every
48 months, whichever occurs first). Visually
inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration.
Adjust valve clearance to factory specifications
if necessary (or every 48 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
55,000 Miles (88 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
380
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines
for damage or leaks (or every 24 months,
whichever occurs first). Replace parts
as needed. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every
30,000 miles (48 000 km) only if your vehicle
is used to tow a trailer.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every
60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or
delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 394 for the proper fluid to use.
65,000 Miles 104 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
70,000 Miles (112 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
381
75,000 Miles (120 000 km)
85,000 Miles (136 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts
(or 12 months since last inspection).
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
80,000 Miles (128 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
382
90,000 Miles (144 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 288 for more
information.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts
(or 12 months since last inspection).
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every
30,000 miles (48 000 km) only if your
vehicle is used to tow a trailer.
95,000 Miles (152 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
100,000 Miles (160 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
105,000 Miles (168 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every
48 months, whichever occurs first). Visually
inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
383
110,000 Miles (176 000 km)
120,000 Miles (192 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every
24 months, whichever occurs first). See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 288 for more
information.
❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.
❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every
48 months, whichever occurs first). Visually
inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
An Emission Control Service.
❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control
Service.
115,000 Miles (184 000 km)
❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 333 for proper rotation pattern and
additional information. (See footnote +.)
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
384
❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration.
Adjust valve clearance to factory specifications if
necessary (or every 48 months, whichever
occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines for
damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whichever
occurs first). Replace parts as needed. An
Emission Control Service. (See footnote †.)
❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every
30,000 miles (48 000 km) only if your vehicle is
used to tow a trailer.
❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every
60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or
delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid does not require changing.
See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 394 for the proper fluid to use.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
❑ Drain, flush, and refill the cooling system
(or every 5 years, whichever occurs first). This
service can be complex; you should have
your dealer perform this service. See Engine
Coolant on page 294 for what to use. Inspect
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,
and neck. Pressure test cooling system and
pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
385
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals
specified to help ensure the safety, dependability
and emission control performance of your
vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add
the proper fluid if necessary. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 305 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Part D.
Hood Latch Operation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Pull the primary hood latch release handle inside
the vehicle. The secondary latch should keep
the hood from opening all the way when the
primary latch is released. Make sure the hood
closes firmly. See Hood Release on page 280 for
further details.
It is important for you or a service station attendant
to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
At Least Once a Month
Engine Oil Level Check
Tire Inflation Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 284 for
further details.
Visually inspect the tires and make sure the tires
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not
forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 329.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add the proper
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 294 for further details.
386
At Least Twice a Year
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Restraint System Check
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather more frequent application
may be required. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 394.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or
that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also
see Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades
on page 359.
Fluid Level Check
Check the power steering pump, rear axle,
transfer case, and automatic or manual transaxle
fluid levels and add as needed. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 304 and Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 290 or Manual Transaxle
Fluid on page 292. Check for leaks. A fluid loss
in these systems could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired at once.
387
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Seat Operation Check
Make sure the head restraints stay in position and
all seat latches lock. Check that the recliner
holds by pushing and pulling the seatback while it
is reclined.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary
latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood
and body door hinges, rear compartment, and any
folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to
use. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment.
388
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on
page 114.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if
it starts.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start
the engine in each gear. The vehicle should
start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the
shift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch
pedal down halfway, and try to start the
engine. The vehicle should start only when
the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts when the
clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down,
contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
service.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 114.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
389
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever
position.
• With an automatic transaxle, the ignition
should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
• With a manual transaxle, the ignition should
turn to LOCK only if you push the ignition
key in farther, while turning it toward LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
390
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and
other debris can collect.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
391
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Exhaust System Inspection
Listed in this part are inspections and services
which should be performed at least twice a
year (for instance, each spring and fall). You
should let your dealer’s service department
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs
are completed at once.
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the
body near the exhaust system. Look for broken,
damaged, missing or out-of-position parts as
well as open seams, holes, loose connections or
other conditions which could cause a heat
build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes
into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 119.
Proper procedures to perform these services may
be found in a service manual. See Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 417.
Fuel System Inspection
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing
parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect
the power steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean
and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for
damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if
necessary.
392
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage
or leaks.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed.
Clean the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser. To help ensure proper
operation, a pressure test of the cooling system
and pressure cap is recommended at least
once a year.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for
wear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspect
drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect
other brake parts, including drums, wheel
cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Check
parking brake adjustment. You may need to have
your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or
binding, and for damaged or missing parts.
Replace parts as needed. Replace any
components that have high effort or excessive
wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise
control cables.
393
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic
Brake/Clutch
System
394
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 284.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 294.
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent.
Power Steering DEXRON®-VI Automatic
System
Transmission Fluid.
GM Goodwrench® Synthetic
Manual
Transmission Fluid
Manual
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346190,
Transaxle
in Canada 10953477 — 1 quart) or
SAE 75W-90 GL-5 gear oil.
Use only T-IV Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Automatic
(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925, in
Transaxle
Canada 22689186). See Automatic
Transaxle Fluid on page 290.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Cylinders
in Canada 10953474).
Manual
Transaxle Shift
Linkage
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Clutch Linkage
Pivot Points
Floor Shift
Linkage
Chassis
Lubrication
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Hood and
Door Hinges
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Fluid/Lubricant
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
395
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed the
service and any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”
on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
396
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
397
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
398
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance Record
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 400
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 400
Online Owner Center ................................. 403
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ........................................... 404
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 404
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 405
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 406
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 409
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ...................................... 411
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 412
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 416
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ................................ 416
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ........................................... 416
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ...................................... 417
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 417
399
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any
concerns with the sales transaction or the
operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your
dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your
concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
has already been reviewed with the sales,
service, or parts manager, contact the owner of
the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the Pontiac
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
400
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your
new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of
court program administered by the Council of
Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the
interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard
within 40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available
to you.
You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle
age, mileage and other factors. General Motors
reserves the right to change eligibility limitations
and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
401
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined in
Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial
program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free
of charge.
402
For further information concerning eligibility in
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you can call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your
GM ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My
GM Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
403
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with
Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
404
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter should
be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
www.Pontiac.com
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma #2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
405
Roadside Assistance Program
In the U.S., call 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800
Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. A person driving
this vehicle without the consent of the owner is
not eligible for coverage.
406
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to
a maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
customer to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litres
in Canada). Service to provide diesel may be
restricted. For safety reasons, propane
and other alternative fuels will not be provided
through this service.
• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present the vehicle registration
and personal ID before lock-out service
is provided. Lock-out service is covered at no
charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. If your vehicle does not
start, Roadside Assistance will arrange to
have your vehicle towed to the nearest
authorized dealership. In the U.S.,
replacement keys made at the customer’s
expense will be covered within
10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare
tire in good condition is covered at no
charge. The customer is responsible for the
repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start is covered at
no charge.
Additional Services for Canadian
Customers
• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,
Roadside Assistance can send you detailed,
computer-personalized maps, highlighting
your choice of either the most direct route or
the most scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along with
any helpful travel information we may have
pertaining to your trip. To request this service,
please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as
possible, but it’s best to allow three weeks
before your planned departure date. Trip
routing requests will be limited to six per
calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
In the event of a warranty related vehicle
disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from original point of departure,
you may qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of
$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense
you may incur while waiting for your vehicle to
be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts
and a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
407
• Alternative Service: There may be times,
when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance, your advisor may authorize
you to secure local emergency road service,
and you will be reimbursed up to $100
upon submission of the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures are
covered under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumper
warranty, and the duration of the Base Warranty
Coverage for Canadian customers of the new
Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost for
parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are
the responsibility of the driver.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle.
408
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are
only a phone call away. Pontiac Roadside
Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743), text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438,
Canadian customers call 1-800-268-6800.
Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,
the claims become excessive in frequency or type
of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Pontiac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, interim transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation program.
Several courtesy transportation options are
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
at participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
warranty coverage information.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service,
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and
advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this, and
ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
409
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,
GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by
providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can
offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation and participating
dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time
and distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used as ‘shuttle
service,’ the reimbursement is limited to the
associated shuttle allowance and must be
supported by original receipts.
410
In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may
be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a
courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is
kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may
not be available at every dealer. Please contact
your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms
and conditions described herein at its sole
discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has
a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for
airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected
malfunctions; other information is stored only in a
crash event by computer systems, such as those
commonly called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in
your vehicle may record information about safety
belt usage. If your vehicle is equipped with
StabiliTrak®, steering performance, including yaw
rate, steering wheel angle, and lateral acceleration,
is also recorded. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not record
sounds, such as conversation of vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is
needed and access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data is required. GM will not access
information about a crash event or share it with
others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the
lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or
similar government office,
411
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data,
GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where
appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained
and need is shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a
specific vehicle with non-GM organizations
for research purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have
access to the special equipment that can read the
information if they have access to the vehicle
or the device that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please
check the OnStar® subscription service agreement
or manual for information on its operations and
data collection.
412
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an
acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by
your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center that
has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs
with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer
(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as you may be
charged at the end of your lease for poor quality
repairs.
413
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do
not leave the scene of an accident until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or
you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 406 for more
information.
414
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service will be taking it. Get a card
from the tow truck operator or write down the
driver’s name, the service’s name, and the
phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you
keep these items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will need
from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and policy
number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If they
ask for a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the
damage, make sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to feel
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair
facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it
towed there. Specify to the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be original equipment
parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will
not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is
leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if
your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
415
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company. In
such cases, you can have control of the repair and
parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
416
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that
your vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope
you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-762-2737,
or write:
This manual provides information on unit
repair service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Bulletins
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service
of your vehicle.
In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your General Motors
dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483). This reference number is
needed to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
417
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner manual
will include the Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US
+ Processing Fee
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US
+ Processing Fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, please specify year
and model name of the vehicle.
418
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 272
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 150
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 81
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 275
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 364
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 288
Air Conditioning ........................................... 152
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 163
Readiness Light ....................................... 162
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic
Module (SDM) .......................................... 411
Airbag System ............................................... 63
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 81
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 72
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 74
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 80
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 71
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................. 72
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 70
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 66
Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System .......................................
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .......
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheels ....................................
Care of Safety Belts ................................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...........................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ..............
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ..........
Fabric/Carpet ...........................................
Finish Care ..............................................
Finish Damage .........................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................
Leather ....................................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...............................
Tires ........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...........................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..........
Washing Your Vehicle ..............................
Weatherstrips ...........................................
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ........................................
Ashtray(s) ....................................................
219
219
227
167
359
357
361
358
354
356
358
361
357
356
360
360
361
362
358
358
359
151
419
Audio System(s) ..........................................
Care of Your CD Player ...........................
Care of Your CDs ....................................
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................
Radio with CD ................................ 179,
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................
Setting the Time ......................................
Understanding Radio Reception ...............
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......
Automatic Headlamp System .......................
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid ........................................................
Operation .................................................
177
219
219
219
188
198
178
218
219
147
290
108
420
229
102
315
320
317
315
316
320
318
336
C
B
Battery ........................................................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................
Emergencies ............................................
Panic Assist .............................................
Parking ....................................................
System Inspection ....................................
System Warning Light ..............................
Brakes ........................................................
Braking .......................................................
Braking in Emergencies ...............................
Break-In, New Vehicle .................................
Bulb Replacement .......................................
Back-Up Lamps .......................................
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...............................
Halogen Bulbs .........................................
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps .....................................
Replacement Bulbs ..................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .....
Buying New Tires ........................................
309
244
227
229
231
114
393
166
306
226
California Fuel ............................................. 275
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 273
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 369
Carbon Monoxide ............... 96, 119, 248, 261
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 357
Your CD Player ........................................ 219
Your CDs ................................................. 219
Cargo Cover ............................................... 129
Cargo Tie Downs ........................................ 130
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 210
Center Console Storage Area ...................... 127
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .... 317
Chains, Tire ................................................. 341
Charging System Light ................................ 165
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 170
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 280
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 361
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 43
Infants and Young Children ........................ 40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 49
Older Children ........................................... 37
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position .................................................. 56
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................. 58
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 47
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 151
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels .................................... 359
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 358
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 356
Finish Care .............................................. 358
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 354
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ............................................... 357
Cleaning (cont.)
Leather ....................................................
Tires ........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...........................
Washing Your Vehicle ..............................
Weatherstrips ...........................................
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades ........................................
Climate Control System ...............................
Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ...........
Outlet Adjustment .....................................
Clock ..........................................................
Clutch, Hydraulic .........................................
Coinholder(s) ...............................................
Collision Damage Repair .............................
Compact Spare Tire ....................................
Content Theft-Deterrent ...............................
Control of a Vehicle .....................................
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................
Heater, Engine .........................................
Cooling System ...........................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Cruise Control Light ....................................
Cupholder(s) ................................................
356
360
361
358
358
359
152
156
155
178
293
127
412
354
100
226
169
106
299
143
174
127
421
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ...........................
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ..........................................
Customer Assistance Offices ....................
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..............
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ......
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .....................................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
409
404
404
400
405
417
416
416
406
417
D
Daytime Running Lamps ............................. 147
Defensive Driving ........................................ 222
Disc, MP3 ................................................... 210
Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 273
Door
Ajar Light ................................................. 175
Locks ......................................................... 92
422
Door (cont.)
Power Door Locks ..................................... 94
Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 95
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 24
Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9
Driving
At Night ................................................... 238
City .......................................................... 242
Defensive ................................................. 222
Drunken ................................................... 223
Freeway ................................................... 243
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 246
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 239
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 253
Winter ...................................................... 248
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block .............
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Headlamp Wiring .....................................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
364
367
365
364
365
Electrical System (cont.)
Power Windows and Other Power
Options ................................................. 364
Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 364
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 288
Battery ..................................................... 309
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 170
Coolant .................................................... 294
Coolant Heater ......................................... 106
Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 169
Cooling System Inspection ....................... 393
Drive Belt Routing .................................... 371
Engine Compartment Overview ................ 282
Exhaust ................................................... 119
Oil ........................................................... 284
Overheating ............................................. 297
Starting .................................................... 104
Entry Lighting .............................................. 149
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 411
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 36
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 146
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 288
Finish Damage ............................................ 361
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 219
Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 138
Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 141
Flat Tire ...................................................... 342
Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 343
Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 351
Floor Mats ................................................... 127
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ................................. 290
Manual Transaxle ..................................... 292
Power Steering ........................................ 304
Windshield Washer .................................. 305
Fog Lamps .................................................. 148
Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 14
Fuel ............................................................ 274
Additives .................................................. 275
California Fuel .......................................... 275
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 279
423
Fuel (cont.)
Filling Your Tank ......................................
Fuels in Foreign Countries .......................
Gage .......................................................
Gasoline Octane ......................................
Gasoline Specifications ............................
Low Warning Light ...................................
System Inspection ....................................
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block .............
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Windshield Wiper .....................................
277
276
176
274
274
177
392
367
365
365
364
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Fuel .........................................................
Speedometer ...........................................
Tachometer ..............................................
Gasoline
Octane .....................................................
Specifications ...........................................
Glove Box ...................................................
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..........
424
169
176
160
161
274
274
127
405
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 138
Head Restraints ............................................ 13
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 364
Headlamps
Automatic Headlamp System .................... 147
Bulb Replacement .................................... 315
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 147
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 141
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 315
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps ..................................... 316
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 140
On Reminder ........................................... 146
Heater ......................................................... 152
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 175
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 245
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 246
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 280
Release ................................................... 280
Horn ............................................................ 138
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 23
Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 293
I
K
Ignition Positions ......................................... 103
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 40
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 329
Inspection
Brake System .......................................... 393
Engine Cooling System ............................ 393
Exhaust System ....................................... 392
Fuel System ............................................ 392
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ................. 392
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal .............................. 392
Throttle System ........................................ 393
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 136
Storage Area ............................................ 127
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 148
Cluster ..................................................... 159
Interior Lamps Control ................................. 149
Keyless Entry System ................................... 89
Keys ............................................................. 87
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 310
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 323
Lamps
Exterior .................................................... 146
Fog .......................................................... 148
Interior Control ......................................... 149
Reading ................................................... 150
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 49
Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................. 96
Liftglass/Liftgate ............................................. 96
Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 162
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 167
Brake System Warning ............................. 166
Charging System ..................................... 165
Cruise Control .......................................... 174
Door Ajar ................................................. 175
Highbeam On .......................................... 175
Lights On Reminder ................................. 174
Low Fuel Warning .................................... 177
425
Light (cont.)
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ............. 167
Low Washer Fluid Warning ...................... 175
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 170
Oil Pressure ............................................. 173
Overdrive Off ........................................... 174
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 163
Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 161
StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 168
Taillamp Indicator ..................................... 174
TCS Warning Light .................................. 168
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ... 168
Lighting
Entry ........................................................ 149
Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 253
Locks
Door .......................................................... 92
Power Door ............................................... 94
Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 95
Loss of Control ........................................... 237
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 177
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ................. 175
426
M
Maintenance, Normal Replacement Parts ....
Maintenance Schedule
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................
At Least Once a Month ............................
At Least Once a Year ..............................
At Least Twice a Year ..............................
Brake System Inspection ..........................
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...........
Exhaust System Inspection ......................
Fuel System Inspection ............................
How This Section is Organized ................
Introduction ..............................................
Maintenance Requirements ......................
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance
Services ...............................................
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ......
Part C - Periodic Maintenance
Inspections ...........................................
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants .............................................
Part E - Maintenance Record ...................
Scheduled Maintenance ...........................
370
386
386
388
387
393
393
392
392
374
374
374
376
386
392
394
396
377
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive
Axle Boot and Seal Inspection .............. 392
Throttle System Inspection ....................... 393
Using ....................................................... 376
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 374
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 170
Manual Seats .................................................. 8
Manual Transaxle
Fluid ........................................................ 292
Operation ................................................. 111
Manual Windows ........................................... 99
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview ................... 122
Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 121
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 121
Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 123
Outside Remote Control Mirrors ............... 122
MP3 ............................................................ 210
MyGMLink.com ............................................ 403
O
Odometer .................................................... 160
Odometers, Trip .......................................... 160
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 234
Oil
Engine ..................................................... 284
Pressure Light .......................................... 173
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 37
Online Owner Center ................................... 403
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 123
Other Warning Devices ................................ 138
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 155
Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 150
Outside
Convex Mirror .......................................... 123
Remote Controls Mirrors .......................... 122
Overdrive Off ............................................... 111
Overdrive Off Light ...................................... 174
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
N
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 102
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 370
427
P
Paint, Damage ............................................ 361
Panic Brake Assist ...................................... 231
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 115
Shifting Out of ......................................... 117
Parking
Brake ....................................................... 114
Over Things That Burn ............................ 118
Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 118
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ... 376
Part B - Owner Checks and Services .......... 386
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .. 392
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ................................................ 394
Part E - Maintenance Record ...................... 396
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 163
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 156
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 74
Passing ....................................................... 235
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 150
Door Locks ................................................ 94
Electrical System ..................................... 364
428
Power (cont.)
Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........... 151
Steering Fluid .......................................... 304
Windows .................................................... 99
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 36
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 22
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ................................ 297
Radios ........................................................ 177
Care of Your CD Player ........................... 219
Care of Your CDs .................................... 219
Radio with CD ................................ 179, 188
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 198
Setting the Time ...................................... 178
Understanding Reception ......................... 218
Reading Lamps ........................................... 150
Rear Cargo Accessory Track System .......... 129
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 95
Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 16
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 33
Rear Storage Area ...................................... 128
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 142
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming ............ 122
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 121
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 121
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 259
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 89
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ................................................... 90
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................ 346
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 344
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 320
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 416
General Motors ........................................ 417
United States Government ....................... 416
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ................. 82
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ......................................... 83
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ............................................... 32
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 406
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 253
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 371
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 120
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners ............................................. 36
Reminder Light ........................................ 161
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 357
Driver Position ........................................... 24
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 23
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................ 22
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 33
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 36
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 32
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 31
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 377
Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 14
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9
Head Restraints ......................................... 13
429
Seats (cont.)
Manual ........................................................ 8
Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 14
Rear Seat Operation .................................. 16
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10
Securing a Child Restraint
Rear Seat Position ..................................... 56
Right Front Seat Position ........................... 58
Service ........................................................ 272
Accessories and Modifications .................. 272
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ................................................. 274
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 273
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 273
Engine Soon Light ................................... 170
Publications Ordering Information ............. 417
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 80
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 360
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 115
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 117
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 31
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 140
Spare Tire
Compact .................................................. 354
Installing .................................................. 346
Removing ................................................ 344
Storing ..................................................... 351
430
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 369
Speedometer ............................................... 160
StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 231
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 168
Starting Your Engine ................................... 104
Steering ...................................................... 232
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ......................... 392
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 139
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ................... 127
Coinholder(s) ........................................... 127
Cupholder(s) ............................................ 127
Glove Box ................................................ 127
Instrument Panel Storage Area ................. 127
Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ....... 129
Rear Storage Area ................................... 128
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 252
Sun Visors .................................................... 99
Sunroof ....................................................... 131
T
Tachometer ................................................. 161
Taillamp Indicator Light ................................ 174
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..................... 318
TCS Warning Light ......................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..............................
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................
Throttle System Inspection ..........................
Tilt Wheel ....................................................
Time, Setting ...............................................
Tires ...........................................................
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .....................
Buying New Tires .....................................
Chains .....................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ................................
Cleaning ..................................................
Compact Spare Tire .................................
Different Size ...........................................
If a Tire Goes Flat ...................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................
Inspection and Rotation ............................
Installing the Spare Tire ...........................
Pressure Monitor System .........................
Removing the Flat Tire .............................
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .........
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .....
Tire Sidewall Labeling ..............................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...........
Wheel Replacement .................................
168
100
100
393
139
178
322
359
336
341
343
360
354
337
342
329
333
346
330
346
344
351
323
326
338
339
340
Tires (cont.)
When It Is Time for New Tires .................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing a Trailer .......................................
Your Vehicle .............................................
Traction
Control System (TCS) ..............................
Control System Warning Light ..................
StabiliTrak® System .................................
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic .......................................
Fluid, Manual ...........................................
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ...................
Transaxle Operation, Manual .......................
Trip Odometers ...........................................
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................
335
259
261
259
230
168
231
290
292
108
111
160
140
139
U
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 218
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 338
431
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 226
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 253
Parking Your ............................................ 118
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ................................................ 411
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 363
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 363
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 155
Visors ........................................................... 99
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 158
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 138
Other Warning Devices ............................ 138
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ................ 175
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 339
Different Size ........................................... 337
Replacement ............................................ 340
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 47
Windows ....................................................... 98
Manual ...................................................... 99
Power ........................................................ 99
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ... 359
Washer .................................................... 142
Washer Fluid ........................................... 305
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 321
Wiper Fuses ............................................ 364
Wipers ..................................................... 141
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 142
Winter Driving ............................................. 248
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 216
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 219
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 374
432
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement